JP2019150291A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To make it possible to quickly deal with an error handling even if a plurality of errors is overlapped.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes a sound output device (e.g., speakers 19a and 19b) and a control portion (e.g., a game control device 100 and a presentation control device 300). When a detected error is overlapping with an error belonging to a first category (e.g., error category "1") and an error belonging to a second category (e.g., error category "2") different from the first category, a notification sound of one of the errors is outputted from the sound output device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 152

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As error types, there are multiple types of errors including specific types of errors and specific types of errors other than specific types of errors. Only one of the specific types of errors or specific types of errors is displayed in the error information display area. There are gaming machines that can be displayed as information.

JP 2017-121498 A

Such a gaming machine is capable of promptly informing the occurrence of a serious error that requires early resolution by limiting the display of some error information when a plurality of errors overlap. Have. However, restrictions on the display of some error information do not always contribute to quick error cancellation, and improvements are required.

In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can cope with quick error handling even when a plurality of errors overlap.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a sound output device and a control unit. The control unit includes a first error that the detected error belongs to the first category.
When the error of the category and the detected error overlap with the error of the second category belonging to the second category different from the first category, the notification sound of either one of the errors is output from the sound output device Let

According to one aspect, even in the case where a plurality of errors are duplicated in the gaming machine, it is possible to cope with a quick error handling.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 8 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a third diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value change process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value confirmation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area | region of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting port 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting port 2 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the change start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the change start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability variation frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the external information edit process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline | summary of the information disclosure function of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the information disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the collection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collection data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the total process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the total data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of minimum information content ensuring in the total data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output information edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the disclosure process during a game of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion aspect of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the disclosure process in a game of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation display sequence of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation control unit of the fluctuation display of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the presentation control unit in the first half fluctuation | variation of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the production control unit in the sub production of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program and reference table group in the first half variation execution control of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and table selection pattern in the first half fluctuation | variation of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and table selection pattern in the sub production of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table data of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the first half production | presentation distribution process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal lose process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the PB background change process of 2nd Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the control program and table selection pattern in the first half fluctuation | variation corrected in the development process of 2nd Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the control program and table selection pattern in the first half fluctuation | variation corrected in the development process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view (the 1) which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view (the 2) which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item which appears from the package in 3rd Embodiment, and its content. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item which appears from the treasure chest in 3rd Embodiment, and its content. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment displays. It is FIG. (3) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment displays. It is FIG. (4) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the effect performed when a push button is pressed in the pseudo | simulation continuous effect using a push button in 3rd Embodiment, and when not pressing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the package setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the production in the modification 3 of a 3rd embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is FIG. (3) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration symbol in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the design used in the game state in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison between the case where "777" is derived | led-out in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment, and the case where "777" is derived in a special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of two jackpots in the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows transition of the symbol aspect of the decoration symbol in the fluctuation | variation display game of the modification 6 of 3rd Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the display screen of 4th Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display screen of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of 5th Embodiment, and a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and movable accessory of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and movable accessory of the modification 3 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and light-guide plate of the modification 4 of 5th Embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart showing a temporal relationship between an error display (blinking display) and an effect for concealing the error display. It is a figure which shows the status display apparatus which is a display means of a base, and the storage area for bases. It is a figure which shows the example of a display by a status display apparatus. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the command system of 6th Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the command system of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of a change of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation table of 6th Embodiment (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation table of 6th Embodiment (the 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship table of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect distribution process of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of effect distribution of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect distribution process of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a perspective view (the 1) which shows an example of the game machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a perspective view (the 2) which shows an example of the game machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after power activation in the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transfer to control state S5 (game state) from control state S0 (setting change state) of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting regarding the setting change in the display apparatus of 7th Embodiment, and alerting | reporting regarding RAM clear. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting regarding the setting change in the sound output device of 7th Embodiment, and alerting | reporting regarding RAM clear. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the alerting | reporting regarding the setting change in the sound output device of 7th Embodiment, and the alerting | reporting regarding RAM clear. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the alerting | reporting regarding the setting change in the sound output device of 7th Embodiment, and the alerting | reporting regarding RAM clear. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the output mode of a different notification sound in the case of carrying out sound output control of the different notification sound of 7th Embodiment simultaneously. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the output mode of a different notification sound in the case of carrying out sound output control of the different notification sound of 7th Embodiment simultaneously. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a power-on notification setting process of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the notification end setting process at the time of power-on of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the alerting | reporting mode of RAM clear alerting according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of alerting | reporting mode of RAM clear alerting according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of alerting | reporting mode of RAM clear alerting according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the alerting | reporting mode of RAM clear alerting according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after power activation in the game machine of the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transfer to control state S5 (game state) from control state S0 (setting change state) of the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the output mode of a different alerting sound in the case of carrying out sound output control simultaneously on the different alerting sound of the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the output mode of a different notification sound in the case of performing sound output control simultaneously on the different notification sounds of the second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the output mode of a different alerting sound in the case of performing sound output control simultaneously on the different alerting sound of the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the normal time of 8th Embodiment, and the display screen in which an error has generate | occur | produced. It is a figure which shows an example of the error category for every error of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error category for every error of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the error category for every error of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the error category for every error of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the error category for every error of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display position and sound output for every error category of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output aspect for every error category of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output device for every error category of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormality alerting | reporting aspect determination process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error display mode of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the error display mode of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the error display mode of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the error display mode of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the cascade display of the modification of 8th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is an outer frame (support frame).
11 is attached so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs are built in, and decorations and effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, if a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are displayed in an abnormality notification color ( Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing in red) and sound (
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound effects) is provided. further,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition,
A lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 and an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher are shown. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 that stores game balls that are paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. In addition, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit 25 is provided at the upper edge of 1 to allow the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25.
a is provided, and a determination button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets an effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can produce an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. For example,
An effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) on a display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character to be displayed can be operated, and the identification information in the special display variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for discharging a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the game ball 32 supplied from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device is used as a game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Further, when the player operates the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, or the brightness of the game board 30 can be set. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is made of resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31 are enclosed. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged at substantially the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that the game ball does not easily jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, the display screen includes an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

In addition, a board production device 44 is provided at the top of the center case 40 to produce a game by operating. This board effect device 44 is displayed from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball that has won the normal start gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning holes 3
5 is arranged on the right side below the center case 40 and on the right part of the special variable winning device 38, which will be described later. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Also, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first start winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like is provided.
In addition, below the usual start gate 34 and at the right side of the center case 40,
An ordinary variable winning device 37 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 (starting port 1) includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. 37b has a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) that is normally almost vertical and in which a game ball cannot flow.
Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric fluctuation is caused by turning the upper end side to the right side by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. The game device can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state. The normal variation winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general power).

A downflow path 91 through which a game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and game balls that have not won the normal variation winning apparatus 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. A start winning opening 92 is provided at the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91.
Is provided. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface with the upper surface 94 descending to the left. The guiding ball 93 receives a game ball that flows downward without receiving a prize at the start winning opening 92 and receives the left of the special variation winning device 38 to be described later. It comes to guide to the direction.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The winning game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Also, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game is arranged. It is installed. The special variable winning device 38 includes an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 3.
8c, and the opening / closing member 3 depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game.
The open / close member 38c is retracted from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) where the prize winning opening is closed to the open state (a state advantageous for the player) where the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. Convert. That is, the special variable winning device 38 is a large winning opening (open / closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device.
A big win game), and a small hit game state (first special game state) based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, or a small hit game state (results of the special figure 2 variable display game) During the second special game state), the prize-winning mouth is converted from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the prize-winning mouth and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (prize ball). Is supposed to be granted. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .

Note that the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) large winning opening switches 38a. Also, the number of special prize winning devices 38 is not limited to one, and two special prize winning devices 38 may be provided. When there are a plurality of big prize opening switches 38a, there are about one or two of each. X as a whole (see FIG. 3) may be provided.

A warp port (warp inlet) 39 a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located immediately above the start winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp outlet 39b
It becomes easy to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) so that the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (the general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning apparatus 38). (Except 35), and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for winning in the special variable winning device 38 or the like.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. Collective display device 50 that displays a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and various information
Is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs, a special figure 1 hold display part 52, a special figure 1 symbol display part 53, a special figure 2 symbol display part 54, and a universal symbol display part. 55, a general map hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a control system for the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. A central processing unit (CPU) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU
The data bus 140 etc. which connect between the part 110, the input part 120, and the output part 130 are comprised.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator. An oscillation circuit that generates a clock (
Crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are connected to a DC (Di
rect Current) DC voltage of a predetermined level such as 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of 32V from the AC power of 24V (AC (
Alternating Current)-DC converter and DC32V to DC12V, DC5V
The normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to notify is provided.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, Alternatively, it may be provided on the main substrate. Game board 30
Since the game control device 100 is subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the gaming microcomputer 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the computer 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a set value change switch 126 and a set key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. For example, the game control apparatus 100 can change the hit probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game according to the setting of six stages.

The gaming control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 allows the setting 1 to the setting 6 to be changed cyclically by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting content on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a set value. For example, the one-digit 7-segment LE is displayed.
D and mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. . For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting content on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
M111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A or the storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Used as ROM111B or R
As the AM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table refers to the fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored as start-up memory by the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining a variation pattern with reference to FIG. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining a first half variation pattern that is a variation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state where so-called full rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state where the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the change mode is stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and in order to display the result mode, the left and right change display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas among the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that is the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. The entire 10 is controlled. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113
And a clock generator for generating a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A determines that the ROM 111B
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Where CP
U111A serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is controlled to drive out the prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Control to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, a start port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a start port 2 switch 92a in the start winning port 92, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a,
Connected to the big prize opening switch 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is inputted, and 0V-
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for converting to a 5V positive logic signal is provided. The proximity I / F 121 also receives a detection signal of a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state such as a floating state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The winning opening switch 35a will be described. In FIG.
Although shown as a single block, in actuality, a plurality (N) of prize opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close to each other by different signal lines. I
/ F121 is input. In FIG. 3, the big winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block. However, in actuality, a plurality (X) of big winning opening switches 38a (3 in this embodiment) are used.
Are provided on the game board 30. The plurality of big prize opening switches 38a are
Each is connected by a different signal line or, for example, a switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The board radio wave sensor 62 and a magnetic sensor 61 described later may be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be connected to the game control device 100 in a similar manner by a wired OR method.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Among the outputs of 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. The signal output (output from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches of FIG. 1, is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 includes a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, detection signal of the set value change switch 126, detection signal of the setting key switch 127, RAM initial The detection signal of the control switch 112 is input.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. Yes.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is asserted (to an effective level) by enabling the gaming microcomputer 111 to decode an address assigned to the second input port 123 and thereby omit an unillustrated enable signal CE (Chip Enable). Can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) Based signal), an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out-ball is detected) The first input port 122 is provided for supplying the emissions 111.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor every time an out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. Out ball detection switch signal is a game performance per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out balls) (for example,
The calculated gaming performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-sphere detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determination of an operation state that becomes a trigger for switching to a game effect or a customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance by a decimal number or a hexadecimal number.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function of removing noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication that prevents signals from being input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 receives data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization that is connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch that does not require any processing, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and a signal of a port selected and controlled by this chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens and closes the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening), and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning apparatus 37. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting open / close data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening and closing and display data of the status display device 135. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. The output unit 130 includes a collective display device 5.
ON / OFF of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed in 0
A third output port 134c for outputting off data and a fourth output port 134d for outputting on / off data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e is provided for output to the. The external information terminal board 71 includes
A photo relay is provided, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134 e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the big prize opening solenoid 38b and the ordinary solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 134c, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 134d. A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fifth output port 1
34e and the fourth output port 134d, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and display data of the status display device 135 that is output from the first output port 134a A fifth driver 138e that receives the signal and generates and outputs a drive signal for the state display device 135 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so as to be lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
You may make it provide in the output part 130 of the game control apparatus 100, ie, the relay board | substrate 70 side instead of the main board | substrate. Further, the state display device 135 or the fifth driver 138e and the state display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external substrate (not shown) side instead of the main substrate. .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
The game microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 through serial communication. In addition, such transmission and reception of data
Since it is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same way as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A tone generator LSI 31 that controls the output of sound to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program executed by the CPU and various data stored therein.
PROM 321 composed of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, FeRAM that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a clocking means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311 a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (production command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
Processing such as management of production time is executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. Also, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the waiting state of the reception of commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT 0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

The sound source LSI 314 is connected to an audio ROM 327 that stores audio data.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as production control command signals (production commands ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (center case 40) A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. Good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25 a and a determination button switch 25 b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect agent switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, or the production control device 300
Is provided with a switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the main control microcomputer 311 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3 V based on DC 5 V is used.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V are provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
Also supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the usual start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in FIG. 4, the random number value for the hit determination of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. A process of determining a hit error is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display unit 55 of the collective display device 50, a process for displaying a universal symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the usual figure change display game is out of place, the normal symbol display unit 55 performs control to display the result form of the deviation.

Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36 and the start port 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the start win (
Start memory), and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination random number value of the first special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. A process of determining a hit error is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 92a provided in the start winning opening 92, and the big hit judgment disturbance of the second special figure variation display game is based on the start memory. ROM111 is extracted from the numerical value
Compared with the determination value stored in B, a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command, production command) including the determination results of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. To do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 has a start winning area for the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (start winning prize port 36, normal variation winning prize device 37,
The game control means controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the starting winning opening 92).

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. And a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state due to the result of the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c is opened, and control is performed to allow the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, has a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins a big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. Opening the grand prize opening until it is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small hit game state is generated when the result of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) or the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is a small hit. In the processing, for example, the CPU 111A controls the opening of the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the big prize opening performed in the small hit gaming state is, for example, that the operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 milliseconds is performed four times at intervals of 1500 milliseconds. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a big prize opening / closing control means for performing control for opening and closing the big prize opening when the stop result form becomes the special result form. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A performs control to display the result form of the deviation on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state.
Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-short state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on a result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed such that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the opening time of the first per-stop symbol (opening time of the normal train) and the number of times of opening (for example,
500 msec x 1), 2nd stop symbol open time (general power open time) and number of releases (eg 1700 msec x 2 times), 3rd stop symbol open time (general power open time) and open Times (
For example, it can be set to be 1700 milliseconds × 3 times.

In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the normal map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal variable prize winning game 37 and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game so as to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 70
4 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 milliseconds is 1352 milliseconds). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) as the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1 /
251) and a higher probability (usually a high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated. Also, the short-running state is the normal power support status (current power support or power support)
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7 segment LED_d1, 7 segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
D is provided. The collective display device 50 includes a 7 segment LED_d1 and a 7 segment LED_d.
2 and various states are displayed according to the lighting modes of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The collective display device 50 distributes various state display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display part 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 are arranged. A special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, a general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, a state display unit 57, and a special symbol 2 hold display unit 58. The round display unit 51 includes four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special game is displayed according to the lighting mode. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display part 53 has 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1.
The symbols in the special figure 1 game are displayed by lighting the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by lighting the eight LEDs of the seven segment LED_d2 (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED). The regular symbol display unit 55 displays symbols in the regular symbol game by lighting the three LEDs LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The usual figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of holds in the usual figure game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7, LE
The gaming state in the special game is displayed by lighting the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the game control unit (CPU 111A).

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, first, a stack pointer that sets a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt is generated after the processing for prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed. A setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and RA is assigned to a predetermined register (for example, D register).
The upper address of the M start address is set (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment,
The address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 0 at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C.
Set 0h.

Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5).
. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, slave control means (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

When the power-on delay timer is timed, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
This is performed using a storage area that is not subject to checksum calculation (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the third input port 124. By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or until the standby time elapses after the power is turned on. 11
2 need to continue to operate. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

Further, the detection signal of the setting value change switch 126 and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 are input to the third input port 124, and the state of the third input port 124 is changed before the standby time starts. By reading, the operation of the set value change switch 126 and the set key switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, the set value change switch 1 after the standby time has elapsed.
26 and the setting key switch 127 are read, the set value change switch 126 and the set key switch 127 are operated after waiting for the elapse of the standby time, or the set value change switch 126 from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 127. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. A situation in which the setting confirmation operation is not accepted can be prevented.

Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7)
After performing the above, the process of monitoring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). First, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8). A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10).
. If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S1)
0; N) is returned to the determination (step S9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y),
In other words, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the gaming machine 10 to be powered off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with malfunctions at power-on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shut-off are retained.
There is no need to perform backup processing when a power failure occurs. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to take a backup of the RAM 111C, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. ] Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is “0” (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, the RAM 111C
Permission is granted to read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as EEPROM or EEPROM (step S13), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 111,
In this first embodiment, the communication control device 300 and the payout control device 200 are used for communication (step S15), and the value of the power failure inspection region 1 in the RWM is normal. For example, it is determined whether or not 5Ah) (step S16).

If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y
), A checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (step S1)
8) Perform.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the game control work area data and the status display work area data may be calculated as the checksum, or the game control work area data and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the area data, or the checksum may be calculated only from the game control work area data. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S18 matches the checksum at power-off (step S19). If the checksums match (step S19; Y).
Sets the RAM clear head address 2 as the head address at the time of RAM clear (step S20). The RAM clear head address 2 is an address that excludes the probability setting value from being cleared.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed from the state of the third input port 124 (
Step S21). When the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S50 (see FIG. 8), and when the probability setting value is not being changed (step S21; N),
Proceed to step S22.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the main body frame (front frame) 12 is in an open state (step S22). When the main body frame 12 is in an open state (step S22; Y
) Proceeds to step S23, and the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S22; N).
Advances to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S50. If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S23; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24). When the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (
In step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S56. When the set value change switch 126 is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S25.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is in an ON state (step S25). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25; Y), the process proceeds to step S59, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on.
When it is not in the N state (step S25; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1).
9: If it is determined as N), the process proceeds to step S46 to guide the RAM clear by setting change.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S26, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26), and the special figure status (the state indicated by the data set in the special figure status area described later) ) To determine whether the special figure game has a high probability (
Step S27). If the special figure game has a high probability (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S28. If the special figure game does not have a high probability (step S27; N), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the special figure game has a high probability, the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S28), and the ON data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (step S29).

Next, a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.
Here, the areas to be initialized in step S26 are areas related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and error fraud monitoring. In step S26, the payout control device 200 is used.
The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a screen designation command, etc. Send. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted. Note that the screen designation command means that the control state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both in normal processing (during fluctuation,
This is a command for instructing the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen in the case of a big hit (first special gaming state) or a small hit (second special gaming state). In some cases, it is a command for instructing display of a recovery screen.

In step S31, a CT that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is generated.
A process for starting the C circuit is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
11A includes a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Done by A. In addition, the hardware random number generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit (
Here, a bit transposition pattern of jackpot random number) is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random bit arrangement (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). is there. By replacing the bits of the random numbers according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Moreover, you may enable it to set arbitrarily by a user.

After that, a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on (soft random number registers 1 to n)
The initial value (start in the case of the first embodiment) of the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial value random number, hit symbol initial value random number) Value) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and an interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small bonus symbol initial value random number” is the special symbol small hit symbol stop It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (small per-spot design random number) that determines the design. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” determines the win symbol of the normal variation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (per symbol random number). The small hit design random number does not exist in a model without small hits, and the hit design initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. By setting the value to (start value), the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken, and it is difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number, for example, by “+1”. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to update the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. Configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, CTC output that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit
C0) is a “low speed counter” updated based on another CTC (CTC2)).
In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number is “+1” or “−1”.
Or a random update in which all values within the range appear in a discrete manner until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit bonus random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, twice)
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process, and when such a method is adopted, In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S).
38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (Step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39) and processing for outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S43), and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44).
) Is performed, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM (step S45) is performed, and then waiting for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Next, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1).
9: N) The RAM clear guidance by the setting change performed in step S46 and after will be described.

When the RAM clear guidance is performed by changing the setting, the RAM clear head address 1 is set as the head address when the RAM is cleared (step S46). The RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control area. The RAM clear start address 1 is an address that designates all of the game control work areas and the game control stack area as clear targets.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the main body frame (front frame) 12 is open (step S47). When the main body frame 12 is in an open state (step S47; Y
) Proceeds to step S48, and the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S47; N).
Advances to step S49.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48; Y), the process proceeds to step S50. If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S48; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

In step S49, a command for changing the setting is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
By transmitting to, RAM clear guidance by changing the setting is performed via the effect control device 300. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display guidance on the display device 41 or speakers 19a, 1
The RAM clear guidance is performed by changing the setting by outputting the guidance sound (including voice) 9b.

The gaming machine 10 performs the process of prohibiting access to the RAM without saving the check data in the power failure inspection area after guiding the RAM clear by changing the setting (step S45).
) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. Thereby, the gaming machine 10
By prompting the setting change prior to initialization when data is abnormal, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being initialized at a timing not intended by the administrator.

Next, when it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), or when it is determined that the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y, step S48;
Y) will be described processing relating to the probability setting value change performed after step S50.

In the processing related to the change of the probability setting value, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibition area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S50). The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be converted (step S51). Note that the initial value saved in step S51 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal after the setting value change is started. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output while the set value is changed.

Further, a probability setting value changing flag is set (step S52). The probability setting value changing flag indicates that the probability setting value is being changed in the set state, and indicates that the probability setting value is not being changed in the reset state.

Further, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S53), and the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the work probability setting value area (step S54). ).

Further, the command for changing the probability setting (for example, the command for changing the (probability setting)) is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) to indicate to the effect control device 300 that the probability setting is being changed. Notification is made (step S55). If the process regarding the probability setting value change up to step S55 is executed, the process proceeds to step S31.

Next, a process related to RAM initialization performed in step S56 and subsequent steps when the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y) will be described. In the process related to the RAM initialization, the RAM clear head address 2 is set as the head address when the RAM is cleared (step S56). The RAM clear head address 2 is an address that excludes the probability setting value area from being cleared.

Further, the data of the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibition area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S57), and the RAM is initialized to the area to be initialized. Save the initial value at the time of conversion (step S
58).

Further, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S59, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demonstration screen) And a plurality of commands such as a command for informing RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for comprehensively controlling the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, which performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means.
In the gaming machine provided with the production control device 300 and the like, the main control means waits for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the sub control device when the power is turned on. Means (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit And the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Note that the game control apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment separates an initialization process at the time of data abnormality (first initialization process) from an initialization process at the time of initialization operation (second initialization process). Since it has functions (first initialization means, second initialization means) to be executed separately, it is possible to realize optimum and wasteful initialization processing according to the situation.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12 that can be operated from the outside
7) and setting change means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit, the setting can be changed and the setting display unit ( By providing the probability setting value display device 136), the setting (setting value) can be confirmed.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S6).
1). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S63) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S64) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed.
In addition, when the signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main process, the output permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device.
At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The launch permission signal is sent from the game control device 10.
It is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from 0, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the payout control device 200 is also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. Output to the control unit. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S65) and random number update processing 2 (step S66) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. . The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In addition, random number update process 1
Alternatively, in addition to the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and an error is detected. A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is performed. In addition, a start port switch monitoring process (step S68) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a is performed. It should be noted that in the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning at the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the first start winning port, or the start winning port 92 that forms the second start winning port, various random numbers are given. (A big hit random number, etc.) is extracted, and a game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on the winning in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, in step S69, a probability setting value change process relating to the change of the probability setting value is performed. In step S70, it is determined whether the probability setting value is being changed by referring to the probability setting value changing flag. If the probability setting value is being changed (step S70; Y), the process proceeds to step S75 to set the probability. If the value is not being changed (step S70; N), the process proceeds to step S71. In step S71, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect by referring to the probability setting value confirmation mode flag. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (step S71; Y), the process proceeds to step S75. If the probability set value confirmation mode is not being executed (step S71; N), the process proceeds to step S72. The flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is a flag that is set or reset in a probability setting value confirmation process described later.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S72) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a special figure 1 game process (step S73a) for performing a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, A special figure 2 game process (step S73b) for performing a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and a general figure game process (step S74) for performing a process related to the general figure variable display game are performed.

Next, segment LEDs (for example, LEs such as the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50) provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying various information related to display of special figure variation display games and games.
D) Segment LED editing process for driving to display desired contents (step S75)
) Magnet fraud monitoring process for performing a process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality (step S76), a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S78) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and status display editing output processing (step S79) for status display are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) are interrupted. Automatically performed on return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S64) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device 50 (
Step S81). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special prize opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S82).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by “+1” in the range of “0” to “3” (step S83), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter Line output data is acquired (step S84). Here, as an example of dynamically turning on LED_d18 from LED_d1 of the collective display device 50,
There are round display, special figure 1 hold display, special figure 1 symbol display, special figure 2 symbol display, universal figure display, universal figure hold display, and state display (game state display such as short-time state and high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S85), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output digit / external information output port (fourth output port 134d) (step S86). ). The external information synthesized in step S85 is
“Door / frame open” and “security signal”.

Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S87), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port for segment output (third output port 134c) ( Step S88).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step S89). The external information to be synthesized here includes “hit signal 1”, “hit signal 2”, “hit signal 3”, “hit signal 4”, “symbol determined number signal”, “start-up signal”, “main prize ball” Signal "and the like. Next, the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire are synthesized (step S90), and the synthesized data is output to the external information / fire permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) for external information output and for firing permission signal output. (Step S9
1).

Next, off output data of probability setting value display is set. That is, the probability setting value display device 1
Probability setting value display output port (second output port 13) for outputting 36 probability setting value display data
The off data is output (reset) to 4b) (step S92).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S9).
3). When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S94, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S9).
3; Go to step S95 in N).

If the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is loaded from the set value display data area in the RWM (step S94).
In step S95, the probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (second output port 134b).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S96). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 7
The synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on 0 (step S97).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S98). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 70 is synthesized.
The synthesized data is output to the upper test signal output port 4 (step S99). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 ( Step S9a).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability setting value is loaded (step S9b). The test signal output data is obtained by loading the probability setting value display data (for example, 7 segment data) corresponding to the probability setting value from the setting value display data area in the RWM, but the probability setting value can be confirmed. If there is, it may be a probability setting value (for example, a numerical value of 1 to 6) or other types of data.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c; Y), the process proceeds to step S9d. If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S9c; N), the process proceeds to step S9e.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting value and the setting key switch on information are synthesized (step S9d).
In step S9e, the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay board 70, and the output process is terminated.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this winning prize switch / state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referenced to determine whether the probability setting value is being changed (step S).
101). If the probability set value is being changed (step S101; Y), the process proceeds to step S109. If the probability set value is not being changed (step S101; N), the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect by referring to the probability setting value confirmation mode flag. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (step S102; Y)
), The process proceeds to step S109, and when the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S102;
N), the process proceeds to step S103.

Next, the winning port monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the count switch is input and the number corresponding to the large winning port switch 38a (count switch) in the large winning port (special variable winning device 38) The data indicating the bit position in the signal port is stored) (step S103). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S104) is performed to monitor whether there is any fraud (invalid winning) that wins the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open, and to detect a normal winning. .

Thereafter, a winning mouth monitoring table of the winning mouth switch (starting mouth 1 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric train is prepared (step S105), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning ( Step S106) is executed.

Next, a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, a prize opening switch that can always be awarded (
Here, a winning opening monitoring table for the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S107), and a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (step S108). ).

Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is the current monitoring target is “0”. To “3” (step S109). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of a switch abnormality 1 error output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection, a shot ball break error from the dispensing control device 200, an overflow error from the overflow switch, and a dispensing abnormality error A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the error monitoring based on the crab (step S110).
). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S111) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, according to the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S112). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S113) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S114).
If the value of the state scan counter is not “0” (step S114; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next
This is a case where there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S114; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game as a target is prepared (step S115).
. Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S
116), a payout busy signal check process (step S117) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so the monitoring is performed with a period of 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value changing process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the probability setting value change process according to the first embodiment.

First, referring to the probability setting value changing flag, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (
Step S121). If the probability set value is being changed (step S121; Y), the process proceeds to step S123. If the probability set value is not being changed (step S121; N), step S1 is executed.
Proceeding to 22, executing the probability setting value checking process (step S122), and then ending the probability setting value changing process. The details of the probability setting value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the probability set value is being changed, the probability set value turn-off timer is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability setting value extinction timer is referred to, and when the value of the probability setting value extinction timer is not “0”, “1” is decremented to update the value of the probability setting value extinction timer (step S123). .

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability setting value extinction timer is “0” (step S124).
When the value of the probability setting value extinction timer is “0” (step S124; Y), step S
If the value of the probability setting value extinction timer is not “0” (step S124; N)
Then, the process proceeds to step S126.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value has been changed with reference to the probability setting value changed flag (step S126). If the probability setting value has been changed, the process proceeds to step S127, and if the probability setting value has not been changed. Then, the process proceeds to step S133. The probability setting value changed flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value is changed (the probability setting value is confirmed).

If the probability set value has been changed (step S126; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127).
). When the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), processing related to RAM initialization after changing the probability setting value is performed after step S128, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the OFF state (step S127; N). ) Ends the probability setting value changing process.

Next, when the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y),
Processing relating to RAM initialization performed in step S128 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to the RAM initialization, the RAM clear head address 3 is set as the head address when the RAM is cleared (step S128). The RAM clear start address 3 is an address that excludes the probability setting value area, the random number area for variation pattern (random numbers updated in the random number update process 2), and the initial value random number area from being cleared. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can effectively use the random number agitation during the setting change. Note that the RAM clear start address 3 may be an address that excludes the probability setting value area from being cleared and includes the random number area for variation pattern and the initial value random number area in the clear target.

Next, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S129), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S130). Step S13
The initial value saved at 0 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output while the set value is changed.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S131). It should be noted that by including information related to the setting change (for example, probability setting value display data) in the RAM clear target, the probability setting value after the probability setting value change and the information related to the setting change before the probability setting value change Prevents wrinkles.

Further, a probability setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S132), and the process proceeds to step S34 (see FIG. 7) of the main process. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S132, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 are displayed.
Hold number command, probability information command, probability setting value information command, probability setting change end command (displays a customer waiting demo screen and R with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)
A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the AM initialization are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted. Note that the probability setting change end command may also serve as a RAM clear notification in addition to the probability setting change end notification or instead of the probability setting change end notification. Also,
In step S132, a RAM initialization command may be transmitted in addition to the probability setting change end command or instead of the probability setting change end command.

If the probability set value has not been changed (step S126; N), the processing after step S133 is performed. In step S133, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133). If there is an input from the set value change switch 126, the process proceeds to step S134. If there is no input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133; N), the process proceeds to step S137.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area (working probability setting value) is incremented by “1” and “0” to “5”.
Is updated cyclically within a range of (step S134). The work probability setting value is “
Although six levels from “0” to “5” are used, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or ten levels may be used as long as the value corresponds to the probability setting value. The work probability setting values correspond to the probability setting values on a one-to-one basis, but may have a one-to-many correspondence relationship with the probability setting values. For example, when the probability setting value is in three stages from “0” to “2”, the work probability setting value is changed from “0” to “5”.
The probability setting values “0”, “1”, and “2” are set to the work probability setting values “0,
“1”, “2, 3”, and “4, 5” may be associated with each other.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S135), and the initial value (for example, 10) is stored in the probability setting value extinction timer area.
0 ms) is saved (step S136). The probability setting value extinction timer area is an area for providing a blank display on the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the probability set value display device 136 can perform a blank display every time there is a set value change operation (input from the set value change switch 126).

Next, in step S137, it is determined whether or not a setting value change confirmation operation has been performed. For example, the setting value change confirmation operation may be a touch switch signal. The setting value change confirmation operation may use an input different from the touch switch signal, or may use an input signal from a dedicated operation switch provided separately, or input from two or more switches. A signal combination or the like may be used. If there is a set value change confirming operation, the process proceeds to step S138. If there is no set value change confirming operation (step S137; N), the probability set value changing process is terminated.

When there is an operation for confirming the setting value change (step S137; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the probability setting value area (step S138), and the probability setting value display corresponding to the probability setting value is displayed. The data is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S139), and the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S140).

Furthermore, a probability setting value change command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S141), and the probability setting value change process is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S141, a probability setting value change command (displays a customer waiting demo screen and notifies a probability setting value change with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information may be transmitted.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation process (step S122) in the above-described probability setting value changing process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the probability setting value confirmation process according to the first embodiment.

In step S151, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect by referring to the probability setting value confirmation mode flag. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (step S151; Y)
) Go to Step S159, and if not in the probability setting value confirmation mode, go to Step S152.

When the probability set value confirmation mode is not being executed (step S151; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the game is being executed (step S153).
) If the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S154. If the game is in progress (step S153)
; Y) terminates the probability setting value confirmation process. Note that the game state means a gaming state with a high probability that the player is playing a game, for example, during a special figure change, during a normal figure change, during a special figure, or during a special figure. In addition, “in game” may include a gaming state in which the number of special figure 1 holds and the number of special figure 2 held.

When the game is not in progress (step S153; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S155, where the setting key switch 12
If 7 is not in the ON state (step S154; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S155), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S156), and the security signal control timer is set. The initial value is saved in the area (step S157). By saving the initial value in the security signal control timer area, the security signal is output for the probability set value display time set as the initial value. The security signal is not limited to the probability setting value display time set as the initial value, but may be output continuously during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Further, a probability setting value confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S158), and the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S158, a probability setting value confirmation command (displays a customer waiting demo screen and notifies the probability setting value confirmation with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information may be transmitted.

When in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S151; Y), the third input port 124
Whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state is determined from the state (step S15).
9). If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S160. If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S159; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S160), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S161).

Further, a command for confirming the probability set value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S162), and the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S162, a probability setting value confirmation end command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and notification of probability setting value confirmation is performed with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In addition, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information may be transmitted.

Next, a memory map of the RAM 111C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a memory map of the game control device according to the first embodiment. Memory map 111
M is a memory map of the RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a state display work area, and a state display stack area in order from the top of the memory. Further, the RAM 111C clearly separates the game control stack area and the status display work area by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the game control stack area and the status display work area. RAM1
11C sets an unused area after the status display stack area, but the status display stack area may be set so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. The RAM 111C may set an unused area between the game control work area and the game control stack area, or between the status display work area and the status display stack area.

Since the game control work area has a probability setting value area at the head, the RAM clear start address 1 is used to clear all of the game control work areas (game control work area) and the game control stack area. To do. In addition, the RAM clear head address 2 is targeted for clearing the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability setting value area. Further, the RAM clear head address 3 has a game control work area and a game control stack area excluding the probability setting value area, the variation pattern random number area, and the initial value random number area as clear targets. In addition, the RAM clear head address 1, the RAM clear head address 2, and the RAM clear head address 3 all clear the area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a payout command transmission process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of the winning number counter area according to the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, for example, the winning number counter area 1 includes three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters. The winning number counter can store up to 65535 winnings. Next, the winning number counter area 2 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 16, a three winning ball counter, a ten winning ball counter, and a 14 winning ball counter, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In the check of the count number of the winning number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are sequentially checked from the top (from the three winning ball counters) by updating the address of the winning number counter area in step S202 and the like which will be described later.

Next, in FIG. 15, the left column is a process for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the counters of a plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls). Among these, it is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter to be checked (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the checking of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count (step S201; Y),
The count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted ("-1" is updated) (step S204), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (for example, three, ten, Any one of 14 is acquired (step S205). Next, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is “0”.
”Or more (step S209; Y), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is“ +1 ”.
Update (step S210) and save the subtraction result in the award ball remaining number area (step S211)
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of main prize ball signal outputs updated in step S210. Here, as a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 payout schedules, and the payout board (payout control device 2).
00), one pulse is output for every 10 payouts.

Next, in the determination in step S203, all checks are completed (step S203;
Y), or if it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is not equal to or greater than “0” (step S209; N), the payout command transmission timer is not “0”. Is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, so the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. Therefore, no subtraction is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213).
), When it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions that the payout busy signal is turned on (busy) are as follows: “Payout operation”, “Ball lending operation”, “Shoot ball breakage error”, “Overflow error”, “Frame radio wave fraud "In", "Dispensing ball detection switch is abnormal (switch that monitors the dispensed ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) (when not = 0).

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If all areas have not been checked (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, if there is a count in the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by “−1” (step S2).
18) The payout number command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2).
20). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213).
213; N), if it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y), in step S217, all areas have been checked (step S217). ; Y), or when the process of step S221 ends, the payout command transmission process ends.

Note that, depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted at every timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses, as can be seen from the configuration in which the process is terminated without executing step S215 and the subsequent steps. I've been sending it. In addition, the payout command is transmitted under the condition that the payout control board can pay out the winning ball.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S68) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 3).
7) is prepared (step A101), hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the start port 1 (step A103).
).

When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the start port 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the start port 1 (step A1).
03; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be right-handed (for example, a normal power support state, a big hit, etc.) (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state is not to be right-handed (step A10)
4; In N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106). To do. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the ordinary power support state, the start port 1 is hardly left if it is not left-handed, and when the start port 1 has won in a predetermined state to be right-handed, it is a predetermined state to be right-handed. Therefore, it is configured that the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the notification control device 300 performs a notification (warning) instructing to make a right strike.

Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 (step A10)
7) Special map start port 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, a winning monitoring table for the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92) is prepared (step A109).
Then, a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the start port 2 (step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the start port 2 (step A111;
In N), the start port switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the start port 2 (step A1).
11; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the ordinary power support state (short-time state) (step A112). If it is determined that the gaming state is not in the ordinary power support state (step A112; N), It is determined whether or not there is (step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the game is not a big hit (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is in the final change of the electric power support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission support final change is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final change of the general power support, it should be left-handed, so the left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

If it is determined in step A112 that the power transmission support state is set (step A112; Y), or if it is determined in step A113 that a big hit is made (step A113; Y), the power transmission support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the process is changing (step A114; Y), the process proceeds to step A117 when the process of step A116 is completed.

When the process proceeds to step A117, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step A117), then the special start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the start port 2, for example, before executing step A112, the power train is fraudulent (regardless of the fact that the normal variable winning device 37 is closed) There is provided a step for determining whether or not there has been a fraud in which a winning to the variable winning device 37 is detected. If it is determined that the normal power fraud has occurred, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and the subsequent steps. The configuration may be such that if there is a fraudulent power transmission, the second start memory (start memory in FIG. 2) may not be generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (Step A102)
, A110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37)
Among the start ports 2 (start winning ports 92), information on no winning of the start port to be monitored is set (step A121), and the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are set.
Among these, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122).
. Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
Then, it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124).
).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the start port 1 and the start port 2, the winning presence information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A 126), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the special start port 1 switch process in the start port switch monitoring process described above (step A
108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure starting port 1 switch process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input from the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (start prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output which is the number of times information relating to the number of winnings to the monitored start port 1 switches 36a, 37a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (step A1).
33). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output number area (step A134), and step A1.
The process proceeds to 35. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133;
In Y), step A134 is passed and the process proceeds to step A135. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal 1 output count area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number (the number of stored start figures of special figure 1) to be updated corresponding to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than four). (Step A135). If the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135)
N) terminates the special figure start port 1 switch process. When the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting a prefetch fluctuation pattern) is set ( In step A136), the special figure 1 suspension number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the RWM big hit random number storage area. (Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit design random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored. The corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area is saved (step A143), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A144) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the monitored special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A145).
An effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special figure starting port 1 switch process is terminated.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable display game. The start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as the start storage serving as the right to execute the. Further, the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) performs a first start with various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning apparatus 37) up to a predetermined number. Memorize as memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A) in the start port switch monitoring process described above.
Details of 118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (start winning prize in the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of wins to the start port 2 switch 92a, is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 is loaded ( In step A151), the loaded value is updated by “+1” (step A152).
), It is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). If the output count does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
If 154 is passed, the process proceeds to step A155. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal 2 output count area. If the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” when “+1” is updated,
It is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than an upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A155).
If the number of special figure 2 reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. When the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A155; Y), a special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting the fluctuation information (for example, for distributing the prefetch fluctuation pattern) is set ( In step A156), the special figure 2 suspension number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (Step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hitting design random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored. The corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area is saved (step A163), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A164) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the monitored special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A165),
An effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control apparatus 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 92, and becomes a right to execute the special figure variation display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit is stored. Further, the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as a second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that there is a high probability (step A172; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that there is no high probability (step A172; N
) Is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that the game is a big hit (step A173; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that there is no big hit (step A173; N
) Is a big hit determination process (step A174) for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A17).
5). If the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is stored. Set (step A176), obtain stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 (step A177), proceed to the processing of step A184, and perform the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), a small hit determination process (step A179) is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. Do it. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). If the determination result is not a small hit (step A180)
; N) sets the stop symbol information of discontinuity (step A183), shifts to the processing of step A184, and performs the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. Is set (step A182), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and an effect command setting process (step A18
5) Perform. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. To do.

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of reach action) and the latter-half variation pattern (variation pattern after the start of reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process (special figure 1 ordinary process or special figure 2 ordinary process described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A144, the special figure type is special figure 1, and therefore the processes in steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and special figure 1 fluctuation described later. When the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, and the processes in steps A186 and A187 are special figure 2 information described later. This is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

With the above processing, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the result control (result of prefetching) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is effected before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, in particular the display device 41.
It is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game, for example, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special FIG. 1 game process (step S73a) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special FIG. 1 game process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game process, monitoring of the input of the special prize opening switch 38a, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 (identification information displayed in a variable manner in the special figure 1 variable display game)
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit in special figure 2 (a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). . When not hitting big hit or small hit of Special Figure 2 (Step A1
; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit shown in FIG. 2 is being made (step A1; Y) and the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step A5).
The branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, 1 Special processing for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation 1 Normal processing (step A8)
To do.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1, setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, etc. The process during one change (step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big hit for each big hit Set the fanfare time according to the winning mouth opening pattern,
Special figure 1 display processing (setting of information necessary for processing during the interval)
Step A10) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A11) to be performed is performed.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “4” in step A7, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the big round is the final round, A large winning opening opening process (step A12) is performed for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step A7, if the big hit round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, while the final round is determined. For example, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and a special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit ending process. Do it.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “7”, the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process are performed. The small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, the setting of information required for performing the small hitting operation transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. A small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", a small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 is performed, and a special figure game process Exit. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing Do it.

Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (step S73b) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 game process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game process, monitoring of the input of the special prize opening switch 38a, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game, special figure 2 (identification information displayed in a variable manner in the special figure 2 variable display game)
Set the display of. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit in special figure 1 is in effect (a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). . When not hitting big hit or small hit of Special Figure 1 (Step A
31; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this big prize opening switch monitoring process, the big prize opening switch 38 a provided in the special variable prize winning device 38.
The process of monitoring the detection of the game ball at is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit shown in FIG. 1 is being made (step A31; Y)
When the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33 is executed.
If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A3).
3). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A 34; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by “−1” (step A36), and the special figure 2 is displayed in the RWM. In the special figure 2 game processing timer area which is an area for storing the game processing timer value, a timer value for long variation (for example, 6
(0000 msec) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A35;
In Y), a special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game process number is used by using the table. The branch address of the process corresponding to is acquired (step A39).
. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4).
7).

If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” in step A47, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 special processing for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation, etc.
8) Perform.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step A49) is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of big hit,
Special figure 2 display processing (step A50) is performed for setting fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern for each jackpot and setting information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A51) to be performed is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A52) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing ball processing, etc. is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “5”, if the big hit round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set while the final round is selected. For example, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit ending process are performed. Do it.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" at step A47, special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “7” in step A47, the predetermined big winning opening opening time / opening pattern setting, fanfare command setting, and small hitting process are executed when the small hit occurs. Small hitting fanfare in-process (setting information necessary for performing)
Step A55) is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” in step A47, the setting of the information required for performing the small hitting operation transition process, the small hit end screen command, the small hit remaining ball process, etc. The small hitting process (step A56) is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step A47, the small hit remaining ball process (step A57) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control process (step A60) according to the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” in step A34 (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up, or if the processing of step A37 is terminated, the processing of step A59 Shift to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 routine process (step A8) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 normal processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to change (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the gaming state is
In the case of the period from the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (big hit or small hit) (start of the processing in the special figure 2 display) to the end of the hit operation (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state), that is, special When FIG. 2 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the period, the special figure 1 is determined that the fluctuation can be started.

If it is determined that the special figure 1 can start to change (step A251; Y), whether or not the left hand instruction has been notified (that is, the left hand instruction instruction command is transmitted to the effect control device 300,
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a right-handed instruction notification command has not been transmitted (step A2).
52). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction notification flag has not been set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed. It may be configured.

If the left hand instruction notification has not been completed (step A252; N), a left hand instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), an effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and a left hand instruction notification flag is set (step A253). A255).

When the left hand instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step A256). If it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game is prepared (step A257). A setting process (step A258) is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed.
A special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of holds is prepared (step A260), a production command setting process (step A261) is performed, and a special figure 1 is displayed in the special figure status area in the RWM.
Information indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) is set (information addition) (step A262), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variable display game is high (step A26).
3).

The special figure status area includes information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed) and information indicating that the special figure 2 is being changed (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed). Each of these areas is stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status is in a state of either “Special Figure 1 Fluctuating” or “Special Figure 1 Fluctuating + Special Figure 2 Fluctuating”.

In the special figure 1 change start process (step A259), the process number "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A31 described later).
8, A319), processing for saving the changing flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), processing for setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307, A497 described later) ) Etc. are performed.

If it is not in high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in high probability final variation (step A264). If it is not in high probability final variation (step A264;
In N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step A265). Note that whether or not the high-probability final change is being performed is determined by a high-probability final change flag described later. That is, if the high probability final variation flag is set, it is determined that the high probability final variation is being performed.

And when step A265 is complete | finished, when it determines with it being in high probability (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that it is in high probability final change (step A264;
Y) performs the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step A266) and ends the special figure 1 routine process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation (step A251; N), and when the special figure 1 holding number is “0” (step A256; Y) in step A256, the processing number is “0” is set (step A 267), and the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is the area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A 268). 1 Regular processing ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the determination result in step A251 is affirmative.
If the special figure 1 holding number is not “0”, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) or the like is executed, and even if the special figure 2 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game). Then, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the second start memory. Control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 ordinary process (step A48) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure 2 ordinary processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the gaming state is
In the case of the period from the end of fluctuation (start of processing during display of special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state) in FIG. When FIG. 1 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the period, the special figure 2 is determined that the fluctuation can be started.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 can start to change (step A271; Y), the special figure 2 is displayed.
It is determined whether or not the number of holds (second start memory number) is “0” (step A272). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A272; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure change display game is prepared (step A27).
3) The effect command setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) is performed, and the special figure 2 is changing in the special figure status area in the RWM (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed). Is set (information addition) (step A276),
It is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high (step A277).

Here, the state (that is, the special figure status) indicated by the information set in the special figure status area is “fluctuating special figure 2” and “fluctuating special figure 1 + fluctuating special figure 2” when step A276 is executed. In any of the states.

In the special figure 2 change start process (step A275), a process number "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A34 described later).
8, A349), a process for saving the changing flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), and a process for setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later). ) Etc. are performed.

In addition, for example, after executing step A275, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, and then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (ie, special figure 2). Also, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a decoration special figure reservation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a normal process.

Then, when the probability is not high (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is being made (step A278). When the high probability final change is not being made (step A278;
N) sets the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that a high probability is present (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that a high probability final variation is being performed (step A278;
Y) performs the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step A280) and ends the special figure 2 ordinary process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A272; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is “0” (step A281). If it is determined to be “0” (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A282). And when special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is judged whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A283),
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A283; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and an effect command setting process (step A286) is performed. Note that a command (here, a customer waiting demo command) prepared to perform the effect command setting process is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A281).
N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step A282; Y), and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), “0” is set as the process number ( In step A287), the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in the RWM (step A288), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A271 is affirmative,
If the special figure 2 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) or the like is executed, and even if the special figure 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game). Then, the special figure 2 variable display game is started. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. Control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation start process of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, a special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A302) is performed to set shift information and big hit information for the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the big hit.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
303), the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304) for setting the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is performed to change the first special figure fluctuation display game. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to pattern settings, is prepared (step A305). Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

If it is not in high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in high probability final variation (step A309). If it is not in high probability final variation (step A309;
N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311). Special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not “0” (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, “4” or more (step A).
312), if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not, for example, "4" or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

Note that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is as follows in the variation start information setting process of step A337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a time value (for example, 60000 milliseconds) which is sufficient within the 2-byte range. It is set to “0” (for example, see step A500 described later).

Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, step A
In step 313, the timer value for long variation saved in step A37 described above (for example, 60000).
The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated by adding the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area at that time to the result obtained by multiplying the number of milliseconds) by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer.

When the long variation timer value is 60000 milliseconds (= 60 seconds), for example, the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more. 2 seconds (= 4 × 60 seconds) or more, which is longer than the longest fluctuation time in FIG.
In this case, since it is not necessary to execute Step A315 and Step A316 described later, Step A312 is provided to determine this. Therefore, step A312
The numerical value “4” in FIG. 2 is merely an example of a numerical value for pre-determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. Absent.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314 and the special figure 1 to be started from now on. Fluctuation time (eg, the fluctuation time set in step A306)
Is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 that is currently changing (the calculation result of step A313 or the special figure 2).
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is zero, it is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the time shown by the special figure 2 game processing timer value (step A314).

And when the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 (step A3
14; N) prepares a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is longer (step A315), and performs an effect command setting process (step A316).

Next, when the probability is high (Step A308; Y), when the final probability is high (
Step A309; Y), if special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, “4” or more (step A312;
Y), when the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 (step A314; Y)
) And when step A316 is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 27).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability variation frequency update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is stored in the RWM. In the game process number area, the process number, that is, “1
"Is saved (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is the area for setting the customer waiting demo flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (
Step A322), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323). The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during variation in FIG. 1 (step A324), and the special symbol 1 variation start process is terminated. The reason why “0” is saved in the special symbol number changing symbol number area in step A324 is to start the special symbol 1 variable display from the blank symbol.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 ordinary process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 2 variation start process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331). A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
333), a special figure 2 information setting process (step A334) for setting special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 is performed, and the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to pattern settings, is prepared (step A335). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A338).

Then, when the probability is not high (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is being performed (step A339). When the high probability is not final change (step A339;
N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). Note that the remaining variation time in FIG. 1 can be calculated from the value of the special FIG. 1 game processing timer (value of the special FIG. 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) is the current fluctuation of the special figure 1 that is currently changing. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

And when the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 (step A3
44; N) prepares a command notifying that the fluctuation time of FIG. 2 is longer (step A345), and performs an effect command setting process (step A346).

Next, when the probability is high (Step A338; Y), when the final probability is high (
Step A339; Y), if special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), special figure 2
When the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time in FIG. 1 (step A344; Y), and
When step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 29).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high probability variation number update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 game process number is stored in the RWM. In the game process number area, the process number, that is, “1
”Is saved (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (
Step A352), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the flashing control timer (the timer of the flashing period of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54) is saved in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and the special characteristic of the RWM is saved. The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during variation in FIG. 2 (step A354), and the special symbol 2 variation start process is terminated. The reason why “0” is saved in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area in step A354 is to start the special symbol 2 variable display from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A307 and A337) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment (No. 1).
It is. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment (
Part 2).

In the change start information setting process, first, the target change pattern random number 1, change pattern random number 2,
And the information of the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step A491). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step A491)
491; Y) clears the information (for the holding ball 1) in the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 in FIG. 1 (step A491a). ). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step S491). A491b).

Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first-half variation time value and the latter-half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is added to the target special game process timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game process timer area, During the setting of the special figure 2 information, it is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step A498). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation start of FIG. A49
9) If it is not the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step A499; N), the repeat number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (area for storing the repeat number of the special figure 2 game processing timer in the RWM) “0” is saved (step A500).

On the other hand, if it is the start of long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step A499; Y), “9” is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). If the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step A498; Y), if the processing of steps A500 and A501 is completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

It should be noted that the special figure game processing timer of 2 bytes causes a fluctuation in time that is not sufficient, so that the special figure 2
The number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long fluctuation. Further, for example, if 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496 and “9” is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) is performed. The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in the above-described step A36, and further in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in the above-mentioned step A37. 60000 ms is set. For this reason, in this case, as a result, the total variation time in FIG. 2 is 60000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, resulting in a variation time of 10 minutes. Since it is actually a 4 ms timer interrupt, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, a case where it can be expressed by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

Next, when proceeding to step A502, the data (MODE) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is prepared (step A502), and the data (ACTION) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is prepared (step A503). ), Production command setting processing is performed (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. Thereby, the effect command consisting of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies to the case where the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION” like a production command, but it may be configured in a byte configuration beyond that. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step A).
505) If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by "-1" (step A506), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area of the address is set and shifted (step A507), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the special figure 2 holding number is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of special figure 2 is set. Then, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information related to the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 by the above-described effect command setting process. The effect control apparatus 300 receives the information related to the start of the special figure change display game, In accordance with the determined variation pattern, detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variation commands including information on patterns (sometimes referred to as variation pattern commands). For example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. .

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the high probability change count update process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Details of steps A317 and A347) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 shows the first
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability variation frequency update process of embodiment.

In the high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A551), and when the special figure high probability is not high (step A551; N)
) Ends the high probability variation number update process.

When one of the types of special figure variable display games in the special figures 1 and 2 is in the big hit game state, the win probability of the other variable display game is controlled to a low probability, but one is small. In the case of a win, the other may be in high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the high probability variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high probability variation is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is “0” (step A553).

If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A553; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the high probability variation number is “0” (step A553; Y),
A signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555).
The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two jackpot signals.

Then, a signal related to the end of high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of the high probability & short time are the signals that turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signals that turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal. And a signal to
A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), and the special figure low probability & short time flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (step A559).
), The high probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) to start variation is set (Step A560), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

Note that the high probability final variation flag includes information that can determine the type of special figure variation display game (special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) that is the high probability final variation. In addition, since the internal probability is low at the start of the change in the high-probability final change, the information to show that the change started during the high probability even if the probability is low is now Probability final variation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final variation, the probability state of the target special figure (the set state in the game control device 100) is returned to the low probability at the start of the variation. Thereby, when the game ball wins the starting opening during the special figure change which is the final round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a problem that the hit determination for the starting winning is determined with high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a diagram (No. 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 1 changing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 1 fluctuation processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by “+1” (step A5).
71), a command (decorative special figure 1 command including stop symbol information about special figure 1) is loaded from the special special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A572), and effect command setting processing (step A573) is performed. .

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), an effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final change flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A576). If it is not the high probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is set to the current special symbol 1 variation display game. Stop display time (step A577), and in the case of high probability final variation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of high probability final variation is the
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579, for example.

As an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 136 ms is set as the display time.
The display time of the high probability final change is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 34), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executed) special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of accordance with the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), in the case of deviation (Step A579; Y), Step A
If it moves to 594 and is not off (step A579; N), the special figure 2 is also currently changing (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step A580).

Whether or not the special figure 2 is changing is determined based on any one of the special figure 2 game process number area information, the special figure status area information, or the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area information. Can do. In other words, it may be determined that the change is in progress if “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and it is determined that the change is in progress if special figure 2 is changing in the special figure status area. A configuration may be used, or a configuration may be determined in which a changing flag is saved in the special-figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, or a configuration may be determined based on a combination of these conditions.

If special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A581), and special figure 2 display processing is not being executed. In this case (step A581; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by “+1” (step A
582).

Next, when step A582 is completed and when the special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A581; Y), the current special figure 1 display time (the time set in step A577 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A58
3) The display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A5).
84). When the special figure 2 has already started the stop display by the processing of steps A583 and A584, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

After that, a command (decoration special figure 2 command including stop symbol information about special figure 2) is loaded from the special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and an effect command setting process (step A586) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), and an effect command setting process (step A)
588), and special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A589) is performed.

It should be noted that according to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game that stops displaying decorative symbols is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time The change display of 2 is forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when special figure 2 is not changing (step A5)
80; N) loads a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area, saves it in the winning symbol command area (step A590), and determines whether or not the current special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (step A591). .

And, when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 1 change, information (see special figure 1) from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area.
Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit information to determine the round number upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A592), load information from the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area, and win a big prize Save in the mouth open information area (step A593).

Next, when the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of play (step A579; Y), when the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A5
When 93 is completed, the process proceeds to step A594. When moving to step A594,
Load information (stop symbol number) from the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area, save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A594), perform special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step A595), The special-figure 1 changing process is terminated. In the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, the special figure 1
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, when the variation display game based on the first start memory has a special result (winning), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 35 is a diagram (No. 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 2 changing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 2 variation processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by “+1” (step A6).
01), a command (decoration special figure 2 command including stop symbol information about special figure 2) is loaded from the command special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A602), and an effect command setting process (step A603) is performed. .

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), an effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final variation flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A606). If it is not a high probability final variation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is set to the current special symbol 2 variation display game. Stop display time (step A607), and in the case of high probability final variation (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of high probability final variation is set as the special figure 2 of this time.
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved, for example, in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609.

As an example of the display time of Special Figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 600 ms is set as the display time, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern. The display time of the high probability final change is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the symbol pattern for big hit, the symbol pattern for big hit, and the symbol pattern for small hit. However, different display times may be set.

Next, when proceeding to step A609 (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executed) special figure 2 variable display game is out of the game based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), in the case of deviation (Step A609; Y), Step A
If the process shifts to 624 and is not out of step (step A609; N), the special figure 1 is also currently changing (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step A610).

Whether or not the special figure 1 is changing is determined based on any one of the special figure 1 game process number area information, the special figure status area information, or the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area information. Can do. That is, it may be determined that the change is in progress if “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or it is determined that the change is in progress if special figure 1 is changing in the special figure status area. A configuration may be used, or a configuration may be determined in which a changing flag is saved in the special-figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, or a configuration may be determined based on a combination of these conditions.

If special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A611), and special figure 1 display processing is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the symbol determination number output count is updated by “+1” (step A
612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A611; Y), the current special figure 2 display time (the time set in step A607 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of FIG. 1 (step A61
3) The display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A6).
14). If the special figure 1 has already started the stop display by the processing of the steps A613 and A614, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of FIG. 1 is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

Thereafter, a command (decoration special figure 1 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is loaded from the special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and an effect command setting process (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), and an effect command setting process (step A)
618), and special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A619) is performed.

In addition, according to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the current special figure 2 variable display game that stops displaying decorative symbols is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time The change display of 1 is forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A6)
10; N) loads a command from the decorative special figure 2 command area, saves it in the winning symbol command area (step A620), and determines whether or not the current special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (step A621). .

And, when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation, information (special figure 2) from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area
Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit information that determines the round number upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A622), load information from the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area, and win a big prize Save in the mouth open information area (step A623).

Next, when the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of play (step A609; Y), when the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A6
When 23 is ended, the process proceeds to step A624. When moving to step A624,
Load information (stop symbol number) from the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area, save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step A624), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625), The special figure 2 changing process is terminated. In the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, the special figure 2
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, when the variation display game based on the second start memory has a special result (winning), the game control device 100 serves to end the variation display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A) in the special figure 1 changing process described above.
595) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is a process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as a process number (step A631), and the process is performed in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A632).

Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 1 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 variation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53,
The stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A634), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A) in the special figure 2 changing process described above.
Details of 625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, “2”, which is a process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as a process number (step A641), and the process is performed in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A642).

Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54,
The stop flag related to the change stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A644), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) in the special figure 2 changing process described above.
619) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this special figure 1 display transition process setting process 2, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has started to change is a win, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time is forcibly terminated. It is a process for making it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as a process number (step A651), and the process is performed in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A652).

Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 1 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 variation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53,
A stop flag related to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A654), and the stoppage stop pattern pattern is stored in the stop pattern pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM). (Step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (in accordance with the extracted random number extracted, it is usually a stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 1 variation display game already being executed). However, here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly replaced with a stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outset.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit information in the RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area (RW)
Clear the special figure 1 big prize opening release information in M) (step A657),
The shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit or not or whether it is a big hit or not. RWM area that stores such information, and information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process,
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step A660), the shift symbol number is shifted to the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) in the special figure 1 changing process described above.
589) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this special figure 2 display transition setting process 2, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has started to change is a win, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time is forcibly terminated. It is a process for making it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, “2”, which is a process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as a process number (step A671), and the process is performed in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A672).

Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A674), and the stoppage symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM). (Step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (in accordance with the extracted random number extracted, is usually a stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 variable display game being executed). However, here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly replaced with a stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A676 to 681 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outset.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (area for storing special figure 2 round number upper limit information in the RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (RW)
Clear the special figure 2 big prize opening release information in M) (step A677),
The shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or whether it is a big hit or not. RWM area that stores such information, and information is normally set in the big hit flag 2 setting process,
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A680), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a first diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 display processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 display processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) illustrating the flowchart of the special figure 1 displaying process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and information on the RWM small hit flag 1 area is obtained. Clear (step A702).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is decided that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big win (see Fig. 1) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step A707), an effect command setting process (step A708) is performed, and the number of rounds An upper limit value table is set (step A709). The signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol per signal. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4 ”and others (for example,“ 8 ”and“ 2 ”may be present) are acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the RWM hit symbol command area, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A71).
3) Perform. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A).
714), effect command setting processing (step A715) is performed.

Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that each on / off is determined by the information about the winning prize opening and the probability state. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned on if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned off if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability. The big hit 3 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned off if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned on if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 m
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A717)
The set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A718).

The information on the prize winning area illegal prize number area is cleared (step A720), the illegal prize outside illegal monitoring period flag area is saved in the illegal prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A721), and step A72.
Move to 4.

When the process proceeds to step A724, 3 is set as the process number (step A724), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A725), and the process transition setting process for the fanfare / interval (step A725) A726) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A705 (step A705)
N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727).
), When it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is being performed (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability final variation is being performed (step A)
728; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A729) Then, the production command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731). A732). Note that step A732 assumes a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handed instruction-notification flag because it is determined as a high-probability final change and the high-probability state has ended. Illustrated. However, if this embodiment is a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is not performed in a high probability state, step A
732 is a deleted configuration (or a left-handed instruction notification in a high probability state, and step A732
Then, there may be a mode in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared.

Next, when step A732 is completed and when high probability final fluctuation is not being performed (step A
728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
733), an effect command setting process (step A734) is performed. Subsequently, a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and an effect command setting process (step A736). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state in which the normal power support state, the big hit or the special mode is not in effect) (step A737).

If it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A73)
7; Y), a signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A743.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740).
). The signal relating to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light up the right-handed display LED, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A743.

When the process proceeds to step A743, the information on the prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step A743), the fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A744), and the process proceeds to step A747. .

When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display-in process is terminated. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, a process number "7" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, and a small hit fanfare time (for example, 4) is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area.
m sec) is saved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not a high-probability final variation is being performed (step A748).
If it is determined in step A748 that a high-probability final change is in progress (step A
748; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A749). Then, effect command setting processing (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A751). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hitting (during big hit or under hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is merely an example in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, similar to step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is not being hit (step A753; N)
The signal related to the left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A754), and the right-handed display LED is turned off. The number in the hit state is saved (step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (during big hit or small hit), the right-hand strike is made with the aim of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. Therefore, when the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), steps A754 and A7 are performed.
55 is passed and it transfers to step A756. Also, when step A755 ends, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM.
The information indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the process number related to the special figure 1 routine process in the special figure 1 game process number area, that is, “0”.
Is saved (step A757), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. Step A75
6 is executed, the special figure status is in a state where only the special figure 2 is changing, or a state where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a third diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 display-in-progress process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the RWM small hit flag 2 area information is loaded. Clear (step A762).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information of the RWM big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A764). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A765). If the big hit flag 2 is determined to be a big hit (step A765; Y), the big hit (second figure 2) of the second special figure variation display game is determined. A signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step A767), an effect command setting process (step A768) is performed, and the number of rounds An upper limit value table is set (step A769). The signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous action device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4 ”and others (for example,“ 8 ”and“ 2 ”may be present) are acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A770). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the RWM hit special figure command area, prepared (step A772), and an effect command setting process (step A77).
3) Perform. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A).
774), production command setting processing (step A775) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that each on / off is determined by the information about the winning prize opening and the probability state. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned on if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned off if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability. The big hit 3 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned off if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned on if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 m
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A777)
The set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A778).

The information on the prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step A780), the fraud monitoring off-period flag is saved in the big prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A781), and step A78.
Move to 4.

When the process proceeds to step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), and the process transition setting process for the fanfare / interval (step A785) A786) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit in step A765 (step A765)
N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787).
), When it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is being performed (step A788).

If it is determined in step A788 that a high-probability final change is in progress (step A
788; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A789). Then, the production command setting process (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A791). A792). Step A792 assumes a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handed instruction-notification flag because it is determined as a high-probability final change and the high-probability state has ended. Illustrated. However, if this embodiment is a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is not performed in a high probability state, step A
792 is a deleted configuration (or a left-handed instruction is notified in a high probability state, and step A792 is performed.
Then, there may be a mode in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared.

Next, when step A792 is completed and when high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A
788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
793), an effect command setting process (step A794) is performed. Subsequently, a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and an effect command setting process (step A796). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state in which the power transmission support state is not in a big hit or special mode) (step A797).

If it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A79)
7; Y), a signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A803.

When the process proceeds to step A803, the information of the prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step A803), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A804), and the process proceeds to step A807. .

When the process proceeds to step A807, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display-in-process is terminated. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, the special figure 2 game process number area saves "7" as the process number, and the special figure 2 game process timer area has a small hit fanfare time (for example, 4).
m sec) is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not a high probability final change is being performed (step A808).
If it is determined in step A808 that a high probability final variation is being performed (step A
808; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A809). Then, an effect command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A811). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
Step A813). Note that step A812 is merely an example in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, similar to step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (step A813; N
), The signal related to the left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A814), and the right-handed display LED is turned off. The number in the left-handed state is saved (step A815). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the big winning opening (
Since the special variation winning device 38) is to be turned to the right, if Special Figure 1 is a big hit (Step A813; Y), Steps A814 and A815 are passed and the process proceeds to Step A816. . Further, in the present embodiment, when Special Figure 1 is not in big hit (step A8
13; N) (including the case where Special Figure 1 is hitting a small hit), the process proceeds to step A816 after executing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content related to such right-handed left-handed and left-handed changes depending on the board configuration and game characteristics of the gaming machine, and is merely an example. Here, also when step A815 ends, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM.
Clears (information subtraction) information indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A816), and the process number related to the special figure 2 routine process in the special figure 2 game process number area, that is, “0”.
Is saved (step A817), and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated. Step A81
6 is executed, the special figure status is in a state where only the special figure 1 is changing, or a state where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S78) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. FIG. 47 is a first diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, a payout command transmission process (step S72), a prize opening switch /
Based on the monitoring results of the state monitoring process (step S67), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77), an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device, or a test firing test. Creates information to be output to the device and sets it in the output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, a process for setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and the security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The ON signal of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S71). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is “0”.
If not, "-1" is updated (step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. And the value of the security signal control timer is “0”
Is determined (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, the value of the security signal control timer is “0”.
(Step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, step C79.
Is passed. That is, from the time when the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer after the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the main processing described above, until the security signal control timer expires, On-data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, a magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), a panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step C81;
Y), fraud of the frame radio wave is occurring (step C82; Y), and the prize winning fraud is occurring (step C83)
Y), or when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored. Save in the test signal output data area (step C86). In the case of the occurrence of unauthorized power transmission, the security signal ON data is similarly saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) A configuration may be adopted.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general electric power fraud, special prize opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether or not a switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87).
If no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C88).

If any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C8).
6). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal variation, switch abnormality, and the like are abnormalities monitored in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process in the timer interruption process.

Next, after finishing Step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the start port 1 (
The start opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal (start opening 1 signal) of the starting winning opening 36, which is the start winning opening 36 of FIG. A start port 2 signal editing process (step C90) for editing a winning signal (start port 2 signal) of the start winning port 92) which is the start winning port of FIG. Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing a main prize ball signal relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol decision number signal is output based on the number of symbol decision times output (number of times of symbol decision number signal output). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main processing]
Next, main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The control unit permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 accesses a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 to permit generation of display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a strand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the strand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of the CPU or the like so as to differ for each gaming machine. May be.

[Step D17] The control unit performs RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300.
The initial value when the power is turned on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control apparatus 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process of performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are valid. Since the effect button does not turn on / off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process or within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting of changeable ranges such as brightness and volume of LEDs and display device 41,
This is a process of accepting an operation such as a change in brightness or volume of the LED or the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit performs a random number update process. The random number update process is, for example, r
This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and parameters for instructing the DP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing. If the frame switching timing, the control unit proceeds to Step D26, and if not the frame switching timing, waits for the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is V blank interrupt (
This timing comes at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of V sync interrupt. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs every time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of the V blank interrupt is 1/60 seconds, for example, as described above. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, the frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a period of 1/30 seconds or more, or less than 1/30 seconds. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

Subsequent processing (step D26 to step D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed for each processing cycle at this frame switching timing by the frame switching timing determination processing. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The control unit performs VDP3 according to the command set in Step D23.
12 is instructed to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and produces an effect corresponding to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of rental balls)) This is a process for correcting the mode.

[Step D31] The control unit executes information disclosure processing. The information disclosure process is a process for disclosing performance information related to game performance to the player.
After executing Step D31, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter performs Step D1.
Steps 8 to D31 are repeatedly executed. That is, Step D18 to Step D
31 is a loop process (repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the production control device 300 is activated).
In some cases, this is called main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processing from step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the presentation of the screen, but the signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processing. The process of actually outputting a drive control signal or the like to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, in the case where an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a view illustrating a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The received command (production command) is MODE data (1 byte) and ACTIO.
N commands (1 byte) are included, and the effect commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

The command reception process from the main board is the “command reception interrupt process” (not shown).
Is done by. In other words, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of the command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer and the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “storing” means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read out for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer only needs to be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception number. The command reception counter is RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a).
Set to Since the command reception counter is cleared to “0” in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time corresponding to one cycle of the above-described processing cycle).

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether the command reception number is not “0 (zero)”. If the command reception number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D43, and if the command reception number is “0”. If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in the above step D41, “loading” data in the control process means that the RAM (the effect control device 300 in this example) is used.
This means that data is taken out from the RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, step D41.
Immediately after execution of “A = B”. Immediately after execution of step D43, “A = A−B =
“0” is a normal movement, but in the aspect of this example, the production control device 300 is a game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the main board 100 is given the highest priority without prohibiting the interrupt, the value of A may increase between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count shifts.
Then, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in this embodiment, the interrupt is disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be “A ← 0”.

[Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, which may be simply referred to as a command buffer hereinafter) (that is, command data stored at an address corresponding to a read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the command buffer read pointer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31”. Do it. “0” to “31” here
This range corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (
That is, it is determined whether step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed by the number of received commands. The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when copying is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data that has not yet been read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not the steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the command for the number of received commands has not been analyzed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit sets the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process to MODE and the lower byte to ACT.
And store them separately. In the case of a fluctuation-type command that commands a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first-half fluctuation pattern, and AC
The lower byte data stored as T is for instructing the latter half fluctuation pattern.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. When the value of MODE is within the normal range, the control unit performs step D53.
If the MODE value is not within the normal range, the received command analysis process is terminated. In addition,
Some MODE values are not defined and are not used. When these values are not used, it is determined in step D52 that they are not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper limit to lower limit of the effective value of this ACT is a predetermined ACTION check table (
In step D53, it is checked whether the value of the ACT separated within the upper limit to the lower limit is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined as the normal range (at this time, a tooth described later) Missing check is not done).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value with respect to the separated MODE value is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT value is the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. The coincidence check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination is performed including a missing tooth check that determines whether or not the ACT value is a normal ACT combination. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but these values are not always continuous (ie, there are values that do not exist discontinuously, values that are missing). It is confirmed whether or not is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if it matches any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is a fluctuation command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the jackpot effect, and the range that the data of the jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-related command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for instructing information related to a special symbol symbol (for example, what is to be a special symbol stop symbol). The range that the data can take is the symbol-type command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. . Unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the single command data can take is the single command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol command range. The control unit executes pre-read symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol system command range (step D64), and if the MODE data is not within the pre-read symbol system command range, step Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The control unit executes prefetch fluctuation command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range (step D66), and is received when the MODE data is not within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are commands for prefetch effects. When any of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is terminated.

Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as a pre-reading notice or a pre-reading notice effect) is a start prize memory in which the special display variable display game is not executed (the start prize memory is held or simply held)
In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not the variation display game corresponding to (2) will be a big hit (or what variation pattern will result) It is an effect such as performing in a mode different from normal. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the variation pattern and stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the prefetch effect. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

Next, an information disclosure function that makes it possible to perceive setting information without excessively exaggerating euphoria will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an overview of the information disclosure function will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of the information disclosure function according to the first embodiment.

The game control device 100 is provided with a set value change switch (set value change SW) 126 to change the set value of the game performance. The set value ranges from “0” to “5”, and the hit probability of the special figure game can be changed in six stages. Further, the game control device 100 includes a probability setting value display device 136, and the setting value set by using the setting value change switch 126 is changed from “0” to “
It can be confirmed by the numerical display of “5”.

The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch 126 and a probability set value display device 136 on the game control board, and the game control device 100 is provided on the back side of the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, so that the game is in progress. There is virtually no opportunity to be observed by any player. In addition, the game control device 100 transmits various commands to the effect control device 300, but does not transmit information related to the setting value to the effect control device 300 by including the information regarding the set value. Thereby, the gaming machine 10
Eliminates the opportunity of confirming the set value by other than the game control device 100, and suppresses the leak of the set value.

The effect control device 300 does not receive a command including information related to the set value from the game control device 100, but receives various commands associated with the progress of the game according to the set value. The effect control device 300 stores the game history in the FeRAM 323 based on the received various commands. Since the FeRAM 323 is a nonvolatile storage unit, it can accumulate a game history for a predetermined period without being lost even when the power is turned off. The effect control device 300 calculates game performance from the accumulated game history.

The effect control device 300 includes a push button 25. The push button 25 is
An operation unit that can accept an operation input, which is the selection button switch 2 described with reference to FIG.
5a and a determination button switch 25b. Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b are a touch sensor detection signal and a push button S.
It is a signal detected by a combination with a W detection signal. For example, a state where the touch sensor detects a touch operation corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects a pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to an ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Also,
The state where the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. The option setting unit 25 is a push button or PB (Push Button) below.
Called. The effect control device 300 can cause the player to select the display content of performance information related to the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 or to select a performance information notification opportunity by an operation input using the push button 25.

The effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 with default display contents or selected display contents. In addition, the effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 at a default notification opportunity or a selected notification opportunity. The display device 41 is a form of notification means, and the production control device 3
00 can use other effect means (for example, the speakers 19a and 19b, the frame decoration device 18, the panel decoration device 46, the panel effect device 44, other sub display devices, LEDs, etc.) as the notification means.

Thereby, the production control device 300 can disclose the performance information as the actual value according to the operation of the gaming machine 10, and as a result, the setting information can be obtained. In addition, the production control device 300 does not disclose the information regarding the set value directly to the player, and thus does not excessively increase gambling. In addition, since the production control device 300 has not received the information related to the setting value from the game control device 100, the production control device 300 does not leak the setting value to the outside. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perceive the setting information without excessively increasing the gambling ability.

Next, information disclosure processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of information disclosure processing according to the first embodiment. The information disclosure process is a process in which the effect control device 300 discloses the game performance according to the set value without acquiring information related to the set value from the game control device 100. Information disclosure processing is performed by the production control device 3.
This process is performed by the control unit 00 (CPU 311). The information disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 (see FIG. 49) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes a setting process. The setting process is a process of setting a disclosure content by accepting a player (may be an administrator or the like) operation. For the setting process,
This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

[Step D72] The control unit executes a collection process. The collection process is a process of collecting game histories. The collection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.
[Step D73] The control unit executes a counting process. The aggregation process is a process for calculating (aggregating) game performance from the collected game history. The counting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.
Will be described.

[Step D74] The control unit executes an output information editing process. The output information editing process is a process of editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D75] The control unit executes an in-game disclosure process. The in-game disclosure process is a process for disclosing game performance during a game (special game) in an edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D76] The control unit executes the non-game disclosure process, and ends the information disclosure process after the non-game disclosure process. The non-game disclosure process is a process for disclosing game performance in an edited output mode other than during a game (special game). The non-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of setting processing according to the first embodiment. The setting process is a process of accepting a player operation and setting the disclosed content. The setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether it is a setting reception timing. The setting reception timing is a timing set in advance as a timing at which a setting operation can be received. For example, the customer waiting state is set as a timing that does not affect the game progress. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when it is the setting reception timing, and ends the setting process when it is not the setting reception timing.

[Step D82] The control unit causes the display device 41 to display a setting screen. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the setting operation according to the display content.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the total period according to the setting operation. The aggregation period is
This is the period to be counted in the period for collecting history (history collection period). The control unit sets the aggregation period by making it possible to select whether the entire history collection period is the aggregation period or whether a part of the history collection period is the aggregation period. In addition, when a part of the history collection period is set as the aggregation period, the control unit can set the start period and the end period or the start period and the end period and the size of the period. Thereby, the control part can make the period which a player desires as a total period.

[Step D84] The control unit sets output information in accordance with the setting operation. The output information is
The performance information to be output from the calculated performance information. The control unit can select whether to output all of the calculated performance information or a part of the calculated performance information and set the output information. Thereby, the control unit can output performance information desired by the player.

[Step D85] The control unit sets a filter according to the setting operation. The filter
Filter the calculated performance information according to the gaming state. The control unit can select whether to output all gaming states for the calculated performance information or to output a specific gaming state for the calculated performance information, and sets a filter. Thereby, the control part can make the performance information in the gaming state desired by the player an output target.

[Step D86] The control unit asks the player to confirm the setting contents, and proceeds to Step D87 when the player confirms the setting contents, and is set when the player does not confirm the setting contents (for example, cancels). The process ends.

[Step D87] The control unit updates the setting with the content received by the setting operation, and ends the setting process. Note that the control unit may set a valid period (for example, 3 hours) in the updated setting contents, and return to the default setting after the valid period has elapsed. The control unit
A default setting return condition (for example, transition to a customer waiting state) may be set in the updated setting content, and the default setting may be returned after the condition is satisfied.

Next, a display screen on the display device 41 during the setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting screen according to the first embodiment.
A display screen 350 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is a display screen displayed in step D82. The display screen 350 includes the title of the setting screen and the guidance for the setting operation in the display content. For example,
The display screen 350 displays “setting guess assist” as the title of the setting screen, and displays operation guidance using the push button 25 as guidance for the setting operation.

A display screen 351 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is a display screen displayed in step D83. The display screen 351 is a display screen during the setting of the totaling period, and includes the title and options during the setting of the totaling period in the display content. For example, the display screen 351 displays “
“Aggregation period setting” is displayed, and “1. All periods”, “2. Fluctuation period event”, “3. Fluctuation period timer”, and “4. Fluctuation period user setting” are displayed as options during the aggregation period setting. . In addition, the display screen 351 displays the selected option among the options for which the total period is being set such that it can be distinguished from other options. For example, the display screen 351 indicates that the option “4. Change period user setting” is underlined and is being selected.

Note that the option “1. All periods” is an option for collecting all periods of accumulated history information. The option “2. Fluctuation period event” is an option for setting a predetermined event trigger in the accumulated history information as the start and end, or the start or end.
The option “3. Fluctuation period timer” is an option for setting a predetermined timer trigger in the accumulated history information as the start and end, or the start or end. The option “4. User setting for variable period” is an option for the user to set one of the beginning and end of the accumulated history information, or one of the start and end (the other is default).

The display screen 352 shown in FIG. 55 (3) is a display screen when “4. Fluctuation period user setting” is selected as an option during setting of the total period. The display screen 352 is a display screen during option setting in the option “4. Variable period user setting”, and includes the title and option setting content during option setting in the option “4. Variable period user setting”. For example, the display screen 352 displays “variable period” as a title during option setting.
"User setting" is displayed, and the total range selected from the history information accumulated as option setting contents (the range from "here" to "here" shown by hatching in the figure) is displayed.

A display screen 353 shown in FIG. 55 (4) is a display screen displayed in step D84. The display screen 353 is a display screen during output information setting, and includes the title and options during output information setting in the display content. For example, the display screen 353 displays “
“Output information setting” is displayed, and “1. Probability per hit” and “2. Corresponding set value” are displayed as options during output information setting. In addition, the display screen 353 displays the selected option among the options for which the output information is being set so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, the display screen 353 displays the option “
1. The hit probability is underlined to indicate that it is being selected. Note that the selection during the output information setting may be to select options exclusively, or to be able to select two or more options simultaneously.

Note that the option “1. Hit probability” is an option that uses the hit probability in the special figure game (the combined probability of the special figure game 1 and the special figure game 2 or the respective probabilities) as output information. Choice
2. “Corresponding set value” is an option that uses a set value (estimated value) corresponding to the hit probability as output information.

A display screen 354 shown in FIG. 55 (5) is a display screen displayed in step D85. The display screen 354 is a display screen during filter setting, and includes a title and options during filter setting as display contents. For example, the display screen 354 displays “
“Filter setting” is displayed, and the options during filter setting are “1. All modes”, “2. Mode A”, “3. Mode B”, “4. Mode C”, “5. Low probability”, “6 .High probability ”,“ 7
. “Power support” and “8. Non power support” are displayed. Further, the display screen 354 displays the selected option among the options being set for the filter so that the selected option can be distinguished from the other options. For example,
The display screen 354 indicates that the option “6. High probability” is underlined and is being selected.

The option “1. All modes” is an option that targets all output modes (or probability states) in the special game as output information. Options “2. Mode A”, “3
. “Mode B” and “4. Mode C” are options for the output information corresponding to the corresponding effect mode among the effect modes in the special figure game. The option “5. Low probability” is an option whose output information is a low probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option “6. High probability” is an option whose output information is a high probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option “7. Electric support” is an option for the output information to be a state with the electric power support (electric power support) in the special electric power game support state. The option “8. Non-electric support” is an option for the output information to be a state where there is no general electric support (non-electric support) among the special electric game support states.

A display screen 355 shown in FIG. 55 (6) is a display screen displayed in step D86. The display screen 355 is a display screen for confirming the setting content, and includes a title for which the setting content is being confirmed and options for confirming the setting content. For example, the display screen 355 displays “setting content confirmation” as the title for confirming the setting content, and displays “OK” and “cancel” as the options for confirming the setting content.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information desired by the player.
Next, the collection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the collection process according to the first embodiment. The collection process is a process of collecting game histories. The collection process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The collection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not there is a game history reset instruction. The game history reset instruction is preferably input by an administrator, for example, an operation input of the RAM initialization switch 112 of the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D92 when there is a game history reset instruction, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no game history reset instruction.

[Step D92] The control unit clears the game history storage area (game history storage area). For example, the control unit clears the game history stored in the FeRAM 323 to zero.
[Step D93] The control unit generates dummy data of a game history. The dummy data is
This is data that prevents the calculation of gaming performance that deviates significantly from the design value when the gaming history is small, and is generated based on the average gaming performance of all set values, for example. The dummy data may be prepared in advance.

[Step D94] The control unit stores the generated dummy data in the game history storage area.
[Step D95] The control unit determines whether or not a command (target command) including information to be collected from the game history is received. The control unit proceeds to step D96 when the target command is received, and ends the collection process when the target command is not received.

[Step D96] The control unit obtains event information when the target command is received.
[Step D97] The control unit acquires the gaming state when the target command is received. The game state to be acquired is the game state used for filtering the target of the output information, and includes, for example, the type of effect mode, the probability state of the special figure game, and the general power support state of the special figure game.

[Step D98] The control unit associates information to be collected from the game history with the game state when the target command is received, and stores it in the game history storage area as a game history. In addition,
The game history storage area is, for example, a ring buffer, and the latest game history can be stored for a predetermined period by overwriting old data with new data. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate a game history for a predetermined period including dummy data. Further, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate a game history corresponding to the actual operation by replacing the dummy data with the game history.

Next, the game history stored in the game history storage area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of collected data according to the first embodiment.
The control unit stores game histories as one event each of one symbol variation of the special game detected from the target command and one hit of the special game. The control unit assigns an event ID (ID) for each event and records the event type (type) and the event occurrence time (time). In addition, the control unit, for each event, the probability state (probability fluctuation) of the special figure game of the event occurrence, the general power support state (electric support) of the special figure game, the type of the production mode (
Recording).

For example, the game history of ID “xxx111” has the type “variation (symbol variation)”, time “t
xxx111 ”, indicating that the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation“ high (high probability) ”, electric support“ present (general power support state) ”, and production mode“ A ”. Also, the ID “xx
The game history of “x211” is of type “variation” and time “txxx211”, and the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation “low (low probability)”, electric support “present”, and production mode “A” Indicates. In addition, the game history of the ID “xxx311” has the type “variation” and the time “txxx3”.
11 ”, indicating that the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation“ low ”, electric support“ none (non-general power support state) ”, and production mode“ B ”. In addition, the game history of ID “xxx 701” is of type “hit (big hit)” and time “txxx 701”, and the game state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation “− (undefined)”, electric support “−”, production Indicates that the mode is "-". In addition, even if the game state at the time of the event occurrence is undefined for the event of type “per”, the control unit triggered the occurrence of the hit by referring to the game state at the time of occurrence of the event of the immediately preceding type “variation” It is possible to specify the game state of the variable display.

Next, the counting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the aggregation process according to the first embodiment. The tabulation process is a process for calculating game performance from the collected game history. The aggregation process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The aggregation process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether or not it is a totaling timing. The control unit
The time when the processing resources of the production control device 300 have a margin is set as the aggregation timing. For example, the control unit uses the symbol stop time after the symbol change as a totaling timing when the game is not being played (waiting for customers, etc.) or during the game. When it is the counting timing, the control unit performs step D102.
Proceed to, and when it is not the aggregation timing, the aggregation processing is terminated.

[Step D102] The control unit acquires a total period according to the setting.
[Step D103] The control unit aggregates the game histories within the aggregation period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area for each gaming state.

[Step D104] The control unit outputs the total result (total data) to the output information storage area (FeR
AM323) and the counting process is terminated.
Next, the total data stored in the output information storage area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of aggregated data according to the first embodiment. The user set period total data shown in FIG. 59 is total data obtained by totaling game histories within the total period set by the user among the game histories stored in the game history storage area.

The user set period total data includes a hit probability for each gaming state and a corresponding set value. The gaming state to be individually counted in the user set period total data is “low probability,-(regardless of normal power support status),” “low probability, with electric support”, “low probability, without electric support”, “High probability,
-"," High probability, with electric support "," high probability, no electric support ". In addition, the production modes to be individually counted in the user set period total data are “all modes”, “mode A”, “
There are “Mode B” and “Mode C”. For example, a gaming state “low probability,-” has a hit probability “
1/210 ”and the corresponding set value“ 3 ”are taken as the total result. The corresponding set value is an estimated value of the set value, and a set value having a game performance (hit probability) close to the hit probability “1/210” is selected as the total result.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform aggregation according to the gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the aggregation according to the gaming state, so that even when the number of data is not sufficient, the gaming machine 10 can perform the aggregation with sufficient reliability depending on the gaming state. For example, gaming machine 10
In some cases, even when the number of hits is not sufficiently obtained during the low probability, the number of hits is sufficiently obtained during the high probability. Further, since the gaming machine 10 performs aggregation for each of a plurality of gaming states or a plurality of production modes, it is possible to provide a counting result that the player believes regardless of whether the counting result is true or false. For example, the gaming machine 10 can give a high degree of satisfaction to a player who believes that the production mode “mode A” is a totaling result that correctly reflects the gaming machine performance. The player's mistakes are corrected in the process of converging to the true value as the data accumulates, and the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the process of converging to the true value as a new interest.

In addition, although user set period total data was demonstrated, it is the same also about the total data of other total periods. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may aggregate the aggregation data of one aggregation period in parallel when calculating the aggregation data of one aggregation period, or one aggregation for saving processing resources. When the total data for the period is totaled, the total data for the other total periods may not be totaled.

It should be noted that the tabulation results that are too misleading will confuse the player, so the gaming machine 1
0 can set the minimum information amount for the total data. Next, securing the minimum information amount of the aggregate data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of securing the minimum information amount in the aggregate data according to the first embodiment.

The summary data that secures the minimum amount of information when the current day history information is the summary data is shown in FIG.
0 (1). Since the history information on the day exceeds the minimum amount of information, all of the history information is aggregated data. The minimum information amount is a threshold value set in advance.

Next, FIG. 60 (2) shows aggregated data for which the minimum amount of information is not secured when the current day history information is aggregated data. Since the current day history information does not exceed the minimum information amount, the shortage is supplemented with dummy data. The amount of dummy data to be supplemented can be reduced by increasing the history information on that day.

As another example, FIG. 60 (3) shows aggregated data that does not secure the minimum amount of information when the current day history information is aggregated data. Since the current day history information does not exceed the minimum information amount, the shortage is supplemented with the previous day history information. The amount of the previous day history information to be replenished can be reduced by increasing the current day history information.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the minimum amount of information about the total data, and can suppress the risk of presenting the miscalculated total result to the player.
Next, output information editing processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the output information editing process according to the first embodiment. The output information editing process is a process of editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The output information editing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D111] The control unit obtains a totaling result of the totaling process.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the setting content set in the setting process.
[Step D113] The control unit determines the output contents (output mode) from the totaled results according to the set contents.

[Step D114] The control unit determines the output timing of the output content according to the setting content or the gaming state, and ends the output information editing process. For example, the control unit determines whether or not a game is in progress,
When the game is in progress, it is determined at what timing the output content is output depending on whether the game is changing or not. More specifically, the control unit can determine a prompt output timing when the game is not being played. Further, the control unit can determine an output timing when waiting for establishment of a preset output condition during a game. The output conditions to be set in advance take into consideration the matching with the game effects and the influence on the game progress. For example, when the control unit is in a variable display, the generation timing of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, a character's speech effect) or an effect that is allowed to overlap with the output content (for example, a cut-in effect). Can be determined as the output timing. In addition, if the control unit is hit, the output timing is an occurrence timing of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, an interval effect) or an effect that is allowed to overlap with the output content (for example, an ending effect). Can be determined.

Next, the in-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process according to the first embodiment. The in-game disclosure process is a process for disclosing game performance during a game (special game) in an edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not it is an information disclosure possible timing based on the output timing determined in Step D114 of the output information editing process. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when it is the information disclosure possible timing, and ends the in-game disclosure process when it is not the information disclosure possible timing.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not a lottery for information disclosure has been won. When a lottery for information disclosure is won, the control unit proceeds to step D123 and performs information disclosure.
On the other hand, the control unit ends the in-game disclosure process without performing information disclosure when the information disclosure lottery is not won.

As described above, the control unit does not necessarily disclose information even at a timing at which information can be disclosed, and only discloses information when winning a lottery. Note that the control unit displays “1” at the disclosure possible timing during the game (for example, during the reach production in the variable display game).
Information disclosure is performed with a lottery probability of “less than” to suppress frequent information disclosure during the game. Further, the control unit responds to the player's disclosure request by disclosing information with a lottery probability of “1” at a disclosure possible timing during non-game (for example, waiting for a customer).

[Step D123] The control unit acquires the output contents determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D124] The control unit selects an effect pattern according to the output content. For example, the control unit selects one of one or more selectable performance patterns (for example, cut-in, character lines, etc.) prepared in advance.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the selected effect pattern so that it can be output by the notification means, and ends the in-game disclosure process.
Next, the information disclosure effect of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a first diagram illustrating an example of an information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a second diagram illustrating an example of the information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment.

A display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1) is a display screen when the symbol is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of variation in the variation display game. The display screen 500 includes a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, and a hold display 505.
And a pending digest display 506 are displayed.

The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving entertainment. Therefore, large symbol group 5
01 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area at a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

In the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at “3”, and the middle symbol is
The symbol “5” indicates that the symbol is stopped, and the right symbol indicates that the symbol is “7”. That is, in the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (the symbol is stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed in a small size on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 is
Including left design, middle design and right design. On the display screen 500, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol that constitute the small symbol group 502 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and its display mode can be greatly changed. Conversely, the small symbol group 502 is
Compared with the large symbol group 501, the display is small and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold memory number of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is “4”.
The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the special figure 2 game hold storage number is "0". The reserved memory number displayed by the hold display 505 corresponds to the sum of the reserved memory number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 503 and the reserved memory number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 504.

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays “4” and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays “0”, the hold display 505 includes four hold storage displays. Indicates that the number of reserved storage is “4”.

The hold display 505 has a display mode (hold storage display displayed on the hold display 505).
The number of reserved memories of the special figure variation display game can be clearly indicated, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be notified.

The reserved digest display 506 indicates whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 500, the reserved digest display 506 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state by blanking the frame. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts a change display.

A display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. A display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen during fluctuation display (during three symbol fluctuation). In the display screen 510, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol fluctuating display game is fluctuating. On the display screen 510, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol fluctuating display game is fluctuating.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the special figure 1 game hold storage number is "3".
The special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is “0”, and the hold display 505 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure variable display game is “3”. ". In addition, on the display screen 510, the on-hold digest display 506 displays the on-hold storage display during digestion and indicates that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

A display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63 (3) is a display screen when a reach effect occurs after the start of variable display. A display screen 511 is a screen after the display screen 510, and a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols are “3”. The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to disclose information calculated from the gaming history when a predetermined effect occurs during reach fluctuation.

A display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4) is a display screen for a cut-in effect during a reach effect. A display screen 512 is a screen after the display screen 511 and a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols are “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with the cut-in display 513 (cut-in effect) for the change display during the reach effect. Cut-in display 513
Produces a predetermined degree of expectation based on the character 514 such as a rocket and the background. Further, the cut-in display 513 displays the disclosure information 515. For example, the disclosure information 515 includes “1/200” as the hitting probability in the counting period and gaming state set by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information while cooperating with the game effects during the game.

Note that the gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 515 in the display content in the cut-in effect during the reach effect, but is not limited to this, other variable display such as during the character effect, during the development effect, during temporary stop, during re-variation, etc. It may be inside or while the symbol is stopped.

A display screen 516 shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a display screen of the hitting interval effect.
The display screen 516 includes a winning type display 517, a game guide 518, a round display 519, and disclosure information 520 in the display content. The winning type display 517 indicates a winning name (for example, “X bonus”) in the production. The game guide 518 guides the player that the batting direction is the right game area. The round display 519 displays a symbol (for example, star display) corresponding to the round, and indicates the current round number and the final round number. The disclosure information 520 includes “1/210” as the hitting probability in the counting period and gaming state set by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information while cooperating with the winning game effect.

Note that the gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 520 in the display contents in the hitting interval effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be during a fanfare, a round, an ending, or the like.

A display screen 521 shown in FIG. 64 (2) is a display screen during ordinary power support (electric support).
The display screen 521 includes a game state display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 523 in the display content. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, “electric support”). The game state display 522 may display a game effect name (for example, “mode A”). Disclosure information 523 is “1” as the hit probability in the total period and gaming state set by the player.
/ 21 "and the character is displayed in relation to the disclosed information. For example, a character such as a tiger suggests a setting corresponding to a hit probability “1/21” (for example, setting “2”).

Note that the gaming machine 10 may disclose information limited to the gaming state in addition to the player setting or instead of the player setting. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a display screen 5
21 may display the probability of winning during ordinary power support (electric support) as the disclosure information 523. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 displays the hit probability in other gaming states with high probability (including latent probability variation), high probability (excluding latent probability variation), and other gaming states on the display screen 521 as the disclosure information 523. May be.

On the display screen 521, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the special figure 1 game hold storage number is "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates the special figure 2 game hold storage. The number is “4”
". On the display screen 521, the hold display 505 and the hold digest display 506 are hidden but may be displayed with priority given to the visibility of the disclosure information 523.

The display screen 524 shown in FIG. 64 (3) is a display screen during ordinary power support (electric support) (another example).
It is. The display screen 524 includes a game state display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 525 in the display content. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, “electric support”). Disclosure information 525 includes “total period set by the player and hit probability in gaming state”
1/18 "and the character is displayed in relation to the disclosed information. For example, a character such as a boy suggests a setting (for example, setting “4”) corresponding to the hit probability “1/18”.

A display screen 526 shown in FIG. 64 (4) is a display screen waiting for a customer. The display screen 526 includes disclosure information 527 and operation guidance 528 in the display content. The disclosure information 527 displays “Mode A” as the game effect name (the game state name may be set) set by the player, displays the hit probability “1/170” in the game effect “Mode A”, and the hit probability “ The setting “5”) is displayed as the setting corresponding to 1/170 ”. The operation guide 528 displays the push button 25 corresponding to the operation unit and the operation guide. Note that the gaming machine 10 may make it possible to update the aggregation period, the aggregation content, and the display content at any time according to the received operation for information disclosure while waiting for customers.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can also make a setting suggestion of the hit probability in addition to the character or by using a background display instead of the character. Next, setting suggestion of the hit probability based on the background display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion mode according to the first embodiment.

Background display during information disclosure has a plurality of types of display modes according to suggested setting values. The estimated set value “0” displays the background in a white (shown in plain light color) display mode. Estimated set value “1”
Displays the background in blue (shown with hatched hatching). Estimated set value “2”
The background is displayed in green (illustrated by cross hatching). The estimated setting value “3” displays the background in a display mode of red (illustrated by a solid dark color). The estimated set value “4” displays the background in a petal pattern display mode. The estimated set value “5” displays the background in a rainbow display mode.

Thereby, the control part can suggest an estimated set value with the background color of a predetermined effect display. For example, the control unit can suggest the estimated setting value “3” by setting the background display of the cut-in effect during the reach effect to a plain dark color on the display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4). In addition, you may make it a control part suggest an estimated setting value not only in the background color of effect display but in another display location. Further, the control unit is not limited to the color and the pattern, but may suggest the estimated setting value by other display modes.

Next, the non-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the non-game disclosure process according to the first embodiment. The non-game disclosure process is a process for disclosing game performance in an edited output mode other than during a game (special game). The non-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The non-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D76 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D131] The control unit determines whether there is a disclosure request operation during a non-game.
For example, the control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is a disclosure request operation during a non-game. The control unit proceeds to step D132 when there is a disclosure request operation during a non-game, and ends the non-game disclosure process when there is no disclosure request operation during a non-game.

[Step D132] The control unit accepts a disclosure content selection operation such as a counting period, a gaming state, display content, and the like.
[Step D133] The control unit performs information disclosure of total data in the total period and game state selected by the player. For example, the control unit performs information disclosure through the display device 41.

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not to end information disclosure. The control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is an information disclosure end operation. Further, the control unit determines that the game start is an information disclosure end operation. When the information disclosure is not terminated, the control unit proceeds to step D132 and continues the information disclosure. On the other hand, the control unit ends the non-game disclosure process when the information disclosure ends.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose desired aggregated data to the player even during a non-game.
Next, an in-game disclosure process according to a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process according to the modified example of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the modified example discloses information at the time of an effect (for example, a push button effect) accompanied by reception of a player operation during the game. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is performed by the control unit (CP of the effect control device 300).
U311). The in-game disclosure process of the modification is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not a player operation has been received during a presentation reception time accompanied by a player operation. The control unit proceeds to step D142 when no player operation is accepted, and proceeds to step D143 when a player operation is accepted.

[Step D142] When no player operation is accepted, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (non-acceptance effect pattern) when no player operation is accepted. The control unit sets the selected non-acceptance effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. Thus, gaming machine 1
0 does not give the player an information disclosure opportunity when no player operation is accepted. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prompt the player to participate in the game.

[Step D143] When a player operation is accepted, the control unit draws lots whether or not to disclose information. When the control unit loses the lottery for information disclosure, step D1
The process proceeds to 44, and if the lottery for information disclosure is won, the process proceeds to Step D145.

[Step D144] When the lottery for information disclosure is lost, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (acceptance effect pattern) that is a game effect pattern when a player operation is accepted and does not involve information disclosure. To do. The control unit sets the selected reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the gaming machine 10 prepares a case where no information disclosure opportunity is given to the player even when a player operation is accepted. Thereby, the gaming machine 10
The value as a privilege for information disclosure can be increased and the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

[Step D145] When a lottery for information disclosure is won, the control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D146] The control unit selects an effect pattern (a game effect pattern (disclosure effect pattern) with information disclosure) that is a game effect pattern in the case where a player operation is accepted and that is based on the output content. The control unit sets the selected disclosure effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the gaming machine 10 provides the player with an information disclosure opportunity while producing rarity even when a player operation is accepted. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a privilege for information disclosure and prompt the player to participate in the game.

Note that the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 can be changed by changing the setting. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 involves turning on the power to change the setting, it is desirable to aggregate the data in units of history information in a range that does not span the power on if a sufficient amount of data can be secured. Also, the gaming machine 10 compares the history information before and after power-on to estimate the presence or absence of a setting change, and if it is estimated that there is no setting change even for history information across power-on, the gaming machine 10 You may make it consider it as the historical information of the range which does not straddle.

Moreover, although the gaming machine 10 can notify the hit probability and the estimated set value, other performance information may be notified. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the probability variation entry rate, the electric support entry rate, the probability variation or the number of consecutive hits during the electric support, the number of winning prize balls, the base, and the like.

It should be noted that the setting in the gaming machine 10 may be performed as follows to prevent fraud prevention.
(1) The game control device 100 uses the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 when the setting is changed.
And the process which forcibly initializes the information memorize | stored in RAM in the payout control apparatus 200 is performed. This prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing game control across different setting values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 when the setting is changed and when the setting is confirmed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify an external connection device (for example, an information disclosure device such as a hall computer or a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has received the security signal can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by notifying means (such as a lamp or sound (including sound)). Note that the game control apparatus 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between setting change and setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is accommodated in the board box and attached to the back side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed substrate box except that required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like face the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111 and the like) that is a trigger for changing the setting or checking the settings is protected by the sealed substrate box. In addition, the game control device 100 faces the setting key switch 127 to the outside, and a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 is sealed by a substrate box. It may be protected.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by requiring the operation of the setting key switch 127 to access a main medium (such as the gaming microcomputer 111) that becomes a trigger for changing the setting or checking the setting. Eliminate third party access to main media. The game control device 1
00 may be configured to allow access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to allow physical operation to the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127 (for example, opening / closing of an operation window) or setting. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by the operation of the key switch 127, or may be a combination of these.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), and a required information display unit (status display device 135).
The probability setting value display device 136) is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. Note that the game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch for giving a game start opportunity, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. It may be.

(6) The game control device 100 includes a RAM initialization switch 112 and a setting key switch 127.
Four power-on states are determined from the combinations of the input states. The game control device 100 is a RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be changed. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be confirmed. Setting confirmation state, RAM initialization switch 112 is ON
When the setting key switch 127 is off, the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the information stored in the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized to a RAM clear (RWM clear) state, and the RAM is initialized. When the switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, a power failure recovery (recovery) state where the power is turned on is set.

(7) The gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps in the setting change state. A setting key is inserted when the setting key switch 127 is OFF with the power OFF (Step 1). Operate the setting key (for example, turn it) and set key switch 1
27 is switched to the ON state (step 2). Depressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 (
When the power is turned on (power switch ON), the setting is changed (
Step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed every time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is ended (
Step 5).

At this time, the notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (sound) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46), steps 3 and 4 are performed.
The setting change is notified at, and the RAM clear is notified at step 5. External information output means (
For example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs a security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops outputting the security signal in step 5. Note that the game control device 100 performs step 5.
Prior to the RAM clear notification, the RAM clear is executed in step 3. That is,
The game control device 100 prioritizes the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly performing the setting value change notification to improve the effect as a countermeasure against fraud. Further, the probability set value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and is turned off in step 5. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in Steps 1 to 4 and Step 5 is displayed.
To display the base value. In the gaming machine 10, the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be provided integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 performs steps 1 and 2.
The setting value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. In addition,
The game state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started at steps 3 and 4, the game is started at step 5, and thereafter the game is in progress.

(8) The gaming machine 10 can perform setting confirmation in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. A setting key is inserted when the setting key switch 127 is OFF with the power OFF (Step 1). Operate the setting key (for example, turn it) and set key switch 1
27 is switched to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (turning on the power switch) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is entered (step 3). The setting confirmation state is terminated by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46). The external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs a security signal in step 3 and stops outputting the security signal in step 4.
The probability setting value display device 136 is turned off at steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed at step 3, and turned off at step 4. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3,
In step 4, the base value is displayed. In the gaming machine 10, the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be provided integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In this case, the status display device 135 is turned off at steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed at step 3, and the base value is displayed at step 4.
Note that the gaming state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started in step 3, the game is started in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can perform setting changes and setting confirmations only before the game starts when the power is turned on. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the setting change or setting confirmation during the game,
The operation guarantee during the game is made easy.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control by making it possible to select a game-related setting from a plurality of types, and a slave control that performs effect control based on a command from the main control device. Device (production control device 300). The slave control device includes a control unit (CPU 311) that generates a game history based on the command, calculates a game performance in a predetermined game state from the game history, and notifies the game performance at a predetermined notification trigger.

(2) The control unit of (1) generates a game history based on a command accompanying the game progress according to the set value.
(3) The control unit (1) accepts an operation of a player (or a manager or the like) and sets notification contents (disclosure contents).

(4) The control unit (1) notifies (disclosures) game performance during the game (special game).
(5) The control unit in (1) notifies (disclosures) game performance other than during the game (special game) (for example, waiting for a customer).

(6) The control unit (1) makes it possible to set a period (aggregation period) to be aggregated in a period (history collection period) during which the history is collected.
(7) The control unit (1) sets the minimum information amount for the aggregated data, and supplements the shortage of the minimum information amount with dummy data.

(8) The control unit in (1) sets the minimum information amount for the total data, and sets the shortage of the minimum information amount in the past history information (for example, the previous day history information or similar total data even before the previous day). Supplemented with historical information etc.).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Conventionally, even if input parameters (commands) are different for the effect control process in the effect control apparatus 300, the same table data is used. However, the development burden tends to increase when it is desired to correct only some of the input parameters (commands) during the development process. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment prepares each control program when the input parameters (commands) are different even in the same process, such as using the same table data. As a result, when it is desired for the gaming machine 10 to correct only a part of input parameter (command) processes in the development process, the game machine 10 only has to correct the correction range only for the process of the input parameter, thereby reducing the program development burden.

First, a typical variable display sequence of the special figure game (special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display sequence according to the second embodiment.

The fluctuation display sequence shown in the figure is from fluctuation start timing t0 to fluctuation stop timing t3.
The time T00 until is the variable display time (including the temporary stop time and excluding the symbol stop time). This variation display sequence is a time T01 from the variation start timing t0 to the timing t1.
Is the first half fluctuation, the time T02 is the second half fluctuation from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and the time T03 from the timing t2 to the fluctuation stop timing t3 is the temporary stop.

The effect control device 300 receives a variation start command from the game control device 100 to start symbol variation (variation start), receives a stop command, and stops symbol variation (variation stop). The change start command may be one command or a command set including two or more commands (for example, stop symbol command, change pattern command, hold command, etc.).

The effect control device 300 receives the change start command and determines the effect control content for each of the first half change, the second half change, and the temporary stop. The latter half fluctuation may include a temporary stop. Therefore, the production control device 300 determines the production control content of the first half variation by one production control program, and the production control content of the second half variation by another production control program. The fluctuation display sequence is based on the first half fluctuation, second half fluctuation, and temporary stop as the basic sequence.
One or more sub-effects can be included as a sub-sequence in the basic sequence.

For example, the effect control device 300 can selectively include the sub-effect at the time T04 and the sub-effect at the time T05 in the first half fluctuation from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1.

The production control device 300 decides all the production control contents (lottery) before the start of the first half fluctuation, and performs the production control during the fluctuation according to the decided production control contents. You may determine the content of production control (lottery) at any time according to progress of control.

Next, the effect distribution in units of effect control program for determining the effect control contents in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect control unit for variable display according to the second embodiment.

The table in FIG. 69 (1) shows combinations of first-half fluctuations and second-half fluctuations in the production control program unit.
The first-half fluctuation “shortening loss”, “normal loss”, “step-up loss”, and “pseudo-continuous loss” do not have a paired second-half fluctuation. That is, the first-half fluctuation “shortening loss”, “normal loss”, “step-up loss”, and “pseudo-continuous loss” are temporarily stopped after passing the latter-half fluctuation.

On the other hand, the first half fluctuation “normal reach”, “step-up reach”, and “pseudo-reach”
Is paired with the latter-half fluctuation “step-up distribution”. The latter half of the fluctuation “step-up allocation”
The details are omitted, but there are two or more sorting patterns.

The production control device 300 includes the first half fluctuation “shortening loss”, “normal loss”, “normal reach”,
An effect control program corresponding to each of “step-up lose”, “step-up reach”, “pseudo continuous lose”, and “pseudo continuous reach” is prepared. In addition, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each distribution pattern of the second half variation “step-up distribution”.

The table in FIG. 69 (2) shows a list of sub effects. Sub-production is "PB (push button)"
"Notice" and "PB background change". The effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each sub-effect.

The effect control program may be provided with one effect control program corresponding to one input parameter (command), or one effect control corresponding to two or more input parameters (commands). A program may be provided. The effect control program is not limited to an independent program as long as the control unit is independent, and may be a subroutine in one program.

Next, an effect control program and a reference table group in the first half variation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of an effect control unit control program and a reference table group in the first half of the second embodiment.

The production control device 300 executes the first half variation program (production control program) “program MP1” while referring to the reference table group (table set) “table set MA”, thereby producing the first half variation “shortening lose” production control content. To decide.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation “normal loss” by executing the first half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation “normal reach” by executing the first half variation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.

In addition, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation “step-up loss” by executing the first half variation program “program MP4” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation “step up reach” by executing the first half variation program “program MP5” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”.

The effect control device 300 determines the contents of the effect control of the first half variation “pseudo-continuous lose” by executing the first half variation program “program MP6” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation “pseudo-reach” by executing the first half variation program “program MP7” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”.

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each first-half variation.
Moreover, the production control device 300 prepares a table set for each first-half variation. The table set may be prepared for each production control program (for example, table set “table set MA”), or shared by two or more production control programs (for example, table set “ Table set MB ").

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the sub effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of an effect control unit control program and a reference table group in a sub-effect of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program (effect control program) “program SP1” while referring to the reference table group (table set) “table set SA”, thereby performing the effect control contents of the sub effect “PB notice”. To decide.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the sub effect “PB background change” by executing the sub effect program “program SP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set SB”.

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each sub effect.
The effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each sub-effect. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, table set “table set SA”), or may be shared by two or more effect control programs.

In addition, although the combination of the control program of the production control unit and the reference table group has been described for the first half fluctuation and the sub-effect, the same applies to the second half fluctuation. In the following, the first half variation and the sub-effect will be described, and the description of the second half variation which is the same will be omitted.

Next, an effect control program executed in the first half variation effect control content determination process and a table set referred to will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the second embodiment.

When the production control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command related to the normal loss, the first half fluctuation program “program MP2” is referred to while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.
”Is determined, the content of the effect control of the first half fluctuation“ normal loss ”from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1 is determined.

In addition, when the production control device 300 receives a change start command related to normal reach,
By executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”, the contents of the effect control of the first half fluctuation “normal reach” from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1 are determined.

The first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are prepared separately, but the reference table group to be referred to is the same (reference table group “table set MB”), and the control contents are the same. is there.

In addition, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” can execute the sub effects “PB notice” and “PB background change” respectively during the first half variation. For example, the effect control device 300 determines whether to execute the sub-effect “PB notice” during the execution of the first half variation program “program MP2” or “program MP3”. Production control device 3
When 00 is to execute the sub-effect “PB notice”, the sub-effect “PB notice” at time T04 is executed by executing the sub-effect program “program SP1” while referring to the reference table group “table set SA”. The content of the production control is determined. In addition, the production control device 300 determines whether to execute the sub production “PB background change” during the execution of the first half fluctuation program “program MP2” or “program MP3”. When the production control device 300 executes the sub production “PB background change”, by executing the sub production program “program SP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set SB”, the sub production of time T04 is performed. The effect control content of “PB notice” is determined.

Next, a table set “table set MB” that the production control device 300 refers to during execution of the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The table set “table set MB” includes a table “table MB1”, a table “
It includes a table “MB2”, a table “table MB3”, a table “table MB4”, and a table “table MB5”.

Each table is a data table and includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and its selection probability (lottery probability). For example, the table “table MB1” includes production patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 14”. The table “table MB2” includes performance patterns “pattern 21” and “pattern 22”. The table “Table MB3”
The production patterns “pattern 31” and “pattern 32” are included. The table “table MB4” includes effect patterns “pattern 41” and “pattern 42”. Further, the table “table MB5” includes the production patterns “pattern 51” and “pattern 5”.
2 ”. In addition, there may be only one effect pattern included in each table,
There may be two or more.

In addition, the solid line which connects each table in a figure shows the first half fluctuation program "program MP2", "
The control sequence of "Program MP3" is shown. For example, the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” have a control sequence for referring to the table “table MB1” first and selecting an effect pattern defined by the table “table MB1”.
The first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” refer to the table “table MB2” when the production pattern “pattern 11” is selected in the table “table MB1”, and the production pattern defined by the table “table MB2”. A control sequence for selecting. In addition, the first half fluctuation program “program MP2”, “program M
P3 ”has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern defined by the table“ table MB3 ”with reference to the table“ table MB3 ”when the effect pattern“ pattern 12 ”is selected in the table“ table MB1 ”. In addition, when the production pattern “pattern 13” or “pattern 14” is selected in the table “table MB1”, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” display the production control content of the sub-production “PB notice”. It has a control sequence for executing the sub effect program “program SP1” to be determined (execution of the subsequence).

Then, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the production pattern “pattern 21” is selected in the table “table MB2”, terminate the first half variation and connect to the second half variation “second half A”. Have Further, when the production pattern “pattern 22” is selected in the table “table MB2”, the first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” refer to the table “table MB4” and the table “table MB4” defines. A control sequence for selecting an effect pattern is included.

Then, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the production pattern “pattern 31” is selected in the table “table MB3”, terminate the first half variation and connect to the second half variation “second half A”. Have Further, when the production pattern “pattern 32” is selected in the table “table MB3”, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” end the first half variation and connect to the second half variation “second half B”. Have

Then, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are the production pattern “pattern 41” or “pattern 42” in the table “table MB4”.
Is selected, the control sequence is such that the first half variation is terminated and the second half variation “second half A” is connected.

The first-half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” refer to the table “table MB5” after executing the sub-effect program “program SP1”
It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern defined by the table “table MB5”.

The first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are sub-effect programs that determine the effect control contents of the sub-effect “PB background change” when the effect pattern “pattern 51” is selected in the table “table MB5”. "Program SP2
”Is executed (sub-sequence execution). Further, when the production pattern “pattern 52” is selected in the table “table MB5”, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” end the first half variation and connect to the second half variation “second half C”. Have

The first-half fluctuation program “program MP2” and “program MP3” terminate the first-half fluctuation after executing the sub-production program “program SP2”, and the second-half fluctuation “second half C”.
A control sequence connected to

In this way, the production control device 300 can determine the production content of the first half variation.
Next, the table control “table set SA” that the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program “program SP1” and the sub effect program “program SP2”.
The table set “table set SB” referred to during execution of “” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the sub-production of the second embodiment.

FIG. 74 (1) shows a table set “table set SA” that the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program “program SP1”. The table set “table set SA” includes a table “table SA1”. The table “table SA1” includes performance patterns “pattern 61”, “pattern 62”, “pattern 63”, and “pattern 64”.

A solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates a control sequence of the sub-effect program “program SP1”. For example, the sub-production program “program SP1” has a table “
A control sequence for selecting an effect pattern defined by the table “table SA1” with reference to the table SA1 is provided.

The sub-effect program “program SP1” can be called by the caller (“pattern 61”, “pattern 62”, “pattern 63”, and “pattern 64” in the table “table SA1”. A control sequence for returning to the execution source program (for example, the first-half variation program “program MP2”) is provided.

The production pattern “pattern 61” (indicated by cross hatching) is a specific production that requires attention to the consistency of the production, and is, for example, an accurate production. The certain effect can be selected only by the variable display for deriving the hit, and may not be selected by the variable display for not deriving the hit.

Sub production program “Program SP1” and table set “Table Set SA” (
Since the table “table SA1”) includes such a specific effect as a control target, the first-half variable programs “program MP2” and “program M” are used as control points that require attention to consistency.
It is separated from “P3”. That is, the production control device 300 uses the first half fluctuation program “
Since the control points requiring attention are separated from the “program MP2”, “program MP3” and the table set “table set MB”, the first-half variable program “program MP2”,
As a whole, consistency is ensured while ensuring a degree of freedom for changing the “program MP3” and the table set “table set MB”.

FIG. 74 (2) shows a table set “table set SB” that the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program “program SP2”. The table set “table set SB” includes tables “table SB1” and “table SB2”. The table “table SB1” includes the production patterns “pattern 71” and “pattern 72”.
including. The table “table SB2” includes effect patterns “pattern 81” and “pattern 82”.

A solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates a control sequence of the sub-effect program “program SP2”. For example, the sub effect program “program SP2” has a control sequence for referring to the table “table SB1” first and selecting an effect pattern defined by the table “table SB1”.

Then, when the production pattern “pattern 71” is selected in the table “table SB1”, the sub production program “program SP2” refers to the table “table SB2” and selects the production pattern defined by the table “table SB2”. It has a control sequence. In addition, the sub production program “program SP2” has a table “table SB1”.
When the effect pattern “pattern 72” is selected, the control sequence returns to the calling source (execution source) program (for example, the first half variation program “program MP2”).

Then, the sub-effect program “program SP2” is a call source (execution source) program (for example, a program (execution source), for example, regardless of whether the effect pattern “pattern 81” or “pattern 82” is selected in the table “table SB2” It has a control sequence for returning to the first half variation program “program MP2”).

The production patterns “Pattern 71” and “Pattern 81” (indicated by cross hatching) are specific productions that require attention to the consistency of the production, and are, for example, accurate productions. The certain effect can be selected only by the variable display for deriving the hit, and may not be selected by the variable display for not deriving the hit.

Sub production program “program SP2” and table set “table set SB” (
Tables “Table SB1” and “Table SB2”) include such a specific effect in the control target, so that the first-half variation program “Program MP” is used as a control point that requires attention to consistency.
2 ”and“ program MP3 ”. That is, the production control device 300
Since the control points requiring attention are separated from the first half program “program MP2”, “program MP3” and the table set “table set MB”, the first half program “
The overall consistency is ensured while ensuring the degree of freedom with respect to the change of the program MP2 "," program MP3 "and the table set" table set MB ".

Next, table data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of table data according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 75 (1) shows table data of the table “table MB1”. The table “table MB1” includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and its selection probability (lottery probability). For example, the table “table MB1” has the production patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13” as selectable production patterns.
, And “pattern 14”. In the table “table MB1”, when the command A is an input parameter, that is, when the change start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern “pattern 11” is “A11%”, and the effect pattern “pattern 12”. Selection probability is “A12%”, and the selection probability of the production pattern “pattern 13” is “A13%”
”, Indicating that the selection probability of the production pattern“ pattern 14 ”is“ A14% ”.
At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the production patterns is “100%”. Command B
The same applies when the command D is an input parameter.

The table “table MB1” has the effect patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 1” when the command C is an input parameter.
“4” indicates that none is selected. In other words, the table “table MB1” indicates that the command C is not an input parameter.

FIG. 75 (2) shows table data of the table “table SB1”. The table “table SB1” includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and its selection probability (lottery probability). For example, table “table SB1” includes effect patterns “pattern 71” and “pattern 72” as selectable effect patterns. In the table “Table SB1”, when the command A is an input parameter, that is, when the change start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern “pattern 71” is “A7”.
1% ”, indicating that the selection probability of the production pattern“ pattern 72 ”is“ A72% ”. At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the production patterns is “100%”. The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table “table SB1” indicates that when the command C is an input parameter, neither the production pattern “pattern 71” nor “pattern 72” is selected. In other words, the table “table SB1” indicates that the command C is not an input parameter.

In addition, the table “table SB1” has the pattern “pattern 71” as a specific effect. The table “table SB1” includes a pattern “pattern 71”. Therefore, in the table “table SB1”, even if there is a change related to the pattern “pattern 71”, a range that requires attention to the consistency of performance can be closed to the range of the table “table SB1”.

Although the tables “table MB1” and “table SB1” have been described as representatives, the same applies to other tables.
Next, the first half effect distribution processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the first-half effect distribution process according to the second embodiment. The first half effect distribution process is a process of distributing the first half variation program to be executed for each input parameter (command). The first half effect distribution process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The first half effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit in step D56 of the received command analysis process.

[Step D151] The control unit uses an input parameter command (variation start command).
To get.
[Step D152] The control unit branches to the step corresponding to the acquired command (first-half effect distribution).

[Step D153] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation “shortening loss”, the control unit executes a shortening loss process. The shortening loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP1” while referring to the reference table group “table set MA”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the shortening loss process.

[Step D154] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation “normal loss”, the control unit executes normal loss processing. The normal losing process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the normal loss process.

[Step D155] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation “normal reach”, the control unit executes normal reach processing. The normal reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the normal reach process.

[Step D156] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation “step-up loss”, the control unit executes a step-up loss process. The step-up loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP4” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up loss process.

[Step D157] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half fluctuation “step up reach”, the control unit executes a step up reach process. The step-up reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP5” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up reach process.

[Step D158] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation “pseudo continuous loss”, the control unit executes a pseudo continuous loss process. The pseudo-losing process is performed by referring to the reference table group “table set MD” while referring to the first half variation program “program MP6”.
”Is executed. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the pseudo continuous loss process.

[Step D159] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation “pseudo-continuous reach”, the control unit executes the pseudo-continuous reach process. The pseudo continuous reach processing is performed by referring to the reference table group “table set MD” while referring to the first half variation program “program MP7”.
”Is executed. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the pseudo continuous reach process.

Next, on behalf of shortened loss processing, normal loss processing, normal reach processing, step-up loss processing, step-up reach processing, pseudo continuous loss processing, and pseudo continuous reach processing,
The normal loss process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of normal loss processing according to the second embodiment.

The normal losing process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The normal loss process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The loss process is usually
This is a process executed by the control unit in step D154 of the first half effect distribution process.

[Step D161] The control unit sets the table set (reference table group “table set M
B ").
[Step D162] The control unit sets a head sequence.

[Step D163] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D164] The control unit refers to the selected table and selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery.

[Step D165] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is a tail sequence. If the current sequence is not the end sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D166, and if it is the end sequence, the control unit ends the normal loss process.

[Step D166] The control unit updates the sequence.
[Step D167] The control unit proceeds to step D163 when the updated sequence specifies the next table selection, and proceeds to step D168 when the updated sequence specifies execution of the sub-effect.

[Step D168] The control unit distributes the sub effects according to the updated sequence. When the sub-production according to the updated sequence is a PB notice, the control unit performs step D
Proceed to 169, and if it is a PB background change, proceed to step D170.

[Step D169] The control unit executes a PB notice process. In the PB notice process, the sub-effect program “program SP1” is referred to while referring to the reference table group “table set SA”.
Is a process of executing. The control unit proceeds to step D165 after executing the PB notice process.

[Step D170] The control unit executes a PB background change process. The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub effect program “program SP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set SB”. The control unit proceeds to step D165 after executing the PB background change process.

Next, the PB background change process will be described with reference to FIG. 78 on behalf of the PB notice process and the PB background change process. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the PB background change process according to the second embodiment.

The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub effect program “program SP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set SB”. PB background change processing
This is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The PB background change process is a process executed by the control unit during the execution of the effect control program (for example, the normal loss process step D170).

[Step D171] The control unit sets the table set (reference table group “table set S
A ").
[Step D172] The control unit sets a head sequence.

[Step D173] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D174] The control unit refers to the selected table and selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery.

[Step D175] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is a tail sequence. The control unit proceeds to step D176 if the current sequence is not the end sequence, and ends the PB background change process if the current sequence is the end sequence.

[Step D176] The control unit updates the sequence and proceeds to step D173.
The gaming machine 10 reduces the program development burden of the effect control device 300 by using such an effect control program.

For example, the first-half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first-half fluctuation “normal reach” are realized by executing the first-half fluctuation program “program MP2” while performing the same production control, but the first-half fluctuation “normal MP” is realized. “Normal Reach” is the first half fluctuation program “Program MP
This is realized by the process of executing “3”. That is, the first half variation “normal loss” and the first half variation “normal reach” realize the same effect control by different programs.

Here, the case where the production control content of the first half variation “normal reach” is changed in the development process will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half of the modification corrected in the development process of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half of the modification corrected in the development process of the second embodiment.

In the development process, the first half variation “normal reach” refers to the reference table group “
Replace with “Table Set MBa”. Thereby, the reference table group “table set M
The first half fluctuation referring to “B” is only the first half fluctuation “normal loss”.

In the development process, the change in the first half variation “normal reach” from the first half variation program “program MP3” to the first half variation program “program MP3a” has no influence on the first half variation “normal loss”.

In the reference table group “table set MBa”, the table “table MB4” is replaced with the table “table MB9”. In addition, the first half program “Program M
“P3a” has three locations before and after the table “table MB9”, the table “table MB9”.
Branches are replaced at a total of four places, one place away from the position (after the table “table MB3”).

The change in the control content of the first half fluctuation “normal reach” in this development process is
If the program is shared between `` Normal Loss '' and the first half fluctuation `` Normal reach '', the first half fluctuation ``
It also reaches “usually lost”. However, the gaming machine 10 has the first half fluctuation “normal loss”
Because the program is not shared with the first half fluctuation “normal reach”, the range of influence of the change in the control contents can be separated.

The gaming machine 10 changes both the first half variation program and the reference table group.
Either one may be changed.
In addition, the first half fluctuation “normal reach” includes a PB notice process and a PB background change process in its control range. The contents of the PB notice process and the PB background change process are entrusted to each sub-effect program. Independent from the first half variable program. Therefore,
The PB advance notice process and the PB background change process are not affected by the change in the first half variation program or its reference table group.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control and a slave control device (effect control device 300) that performs effect control based on a command from the main control device. The sub-control device stores table data that defines the distribution of effects, and table data (reference table group “table” based on a first command (for example, a change start command corresponding to normal loss) among commands. Set MB ”, reference table group“ table set S ”
A ”, a reference control group“ table set SB ”), the first control (normal loss) that controls the production distribution by executing the first program (for example, the first half variation program“ program MP2 ”of the first half variation“ normal loss ”). Processing) and a second program (for example, the first half variation “normal reach”) different from the first program for the effect distribution from the table data based on the second command (for example, the variation start command corresponding to the normal reach). And a control unit (CPU 311) capable of executing a second control (normal reach process) controlled by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP3”).
(2) The table data of (1) includes first table data that does not include a specific effect (reference table group “table set MB”), and second table data that includes a specific effect (reference table group “table set SA”), The reference table group “table set SB”), and the control unit executes the first control that distributes the effects from the first table data based on the first command by executing the first program, 1st based on the second command by execution
The second control for distributing the effects from the table data is executed, and the first program and the third program different from the second program (for example, the sub-effect program “program SP1” of the sub-variation “PB notice”) are executed to execute the first control. Based on the command or the second command, the third control (PB notice process) for distributing the effects from the second table data is executed.

[Third Embodiment]
First, the configuration of the game board of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a front view (No. 2) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

A gaming board 700 in FIG. 81 shows a state in which a movable accessory is stored, and a gaming board 700 in FIG. 82 shows a state in which the stored movable accessory appears so as to be visible.
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the game board 700 is provided with a center case 40 substantially at the center. Inside the center case 40, a display device 41, a second display device 701, lighting units 702a to 702c, a logo display unit 703, a first board effect device 704, and second board effect devices 705L and 705R. A third board effect device 706 and a fourth board effect device 707 are provided.

The second display device 701 notifies information related to the game (for example, a game effect) by display. In the game board 700, the second display device 701 has a hexagonal shape, a display portion for displaying predetermined information such as characters is formed in the center portion, and a frame portion is formed so as to surround the display portion. . The frame portion is configured to be lit with a plurality of lighting colors (for example, configured with LEDs).

The lighting units 702a to 702c notify information related to the game (game progress status, etc.) according to the lighting state. In the game board 700, the lighting unit 702a displays “1”, and the lighting unit 70
2b displays “2”, and the lighting unit 702c displays “3”. The gaming machine 10 is, for example,
The lighting unit 702a is turned on and the lighting unit 702b and the lighting unit 702c are turned off to notify that the progress state is the first stage, and the lighting unit 702a and the lighting unit 702b are turned on and the lighting unit 702c is turned off. It is informed that the progress status is the second stage by setting the state, and the progress status is the third stage (for example, by setting the lighting units 702a to 702c to the lighting state, for example,
That it is immediately before the production starts).

Note that the lighting units 702a to 702c may be configured to be movable (for example, rotatable or swingable), for example. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can more easily grasp that the lighting state (lighting / lighting-off) has changed by moving the lighting units 702a to 702c when switching from light-off to lighting.

The logo display unit 703 is composed of a plurality of characters (a plurality of components) for displaying the product name (product name, brand, etc.) of the gaming machine 10. Each component of the logo display unit 703 is configured to be lit in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, configured by LEDs), and the logo display unit 703 displays information about the game (such as the progress of the game) depending on the lighting state. Inform.

In the game board 700, the logo display portion 703 has “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, and “F”.
“G” is composed of seven components (characters), and each component is configured to control the lighting color.

For example, the logo display unit 703 turns off all components at the start of the production, increases the number of components in the lighting state each time the production progresses, and turns on all the components at the production end timing. Thus, the progress of the game (the progress of the production) is notified. In addition,
The logo display unit 703 turns off all components at the start of the production, increases the components in the lighting state each time the production progresses, and turns on all components only in the case of a big hit, You may alert | report the progress status (game progress status) of a game.

The first board production device 704 produces a game by operating. Game board 700
The first board effect device 704 is shaped like a kite. First board production device 704
Is provided on the left side of the display device 41, and as shown in FIG. 81, the upper portion is inclined toward the display device 41, and the upper portion is operable to a position where it overlaps the front side of the display device 41.

The second board effect devices 705L and 705R perform a game effect by operating.
In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper left side of the display device 41 during normal operation (when not operating) (for example, stored so that it cannot be seen). During the operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the front side of the display device 41 extends from the upper left side of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41. In addition, the second board rendering device 705R is arranged (for example, stored so that it cannot be visually recognized) at a position that does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper right side of the display device 41 during normal operation (non-operation time), and during operation, FIG. As shown in the figure, the display device 41 is operable to appear on the upper right side and extend from the upper right side of the display device 41 to the front side of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41.

The third board effect device 706 performs a game effect by operating. Game board 700
The third board effect device 706 is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 during normal operation (non-operation), and is displayed on the display device 41 during operation as shown in FIG. The front side of the display device 41 can be operated from above the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41.

In the game board 700, the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the third board effect device 706 are coupled to each other while operating in the center, and the three board effect devices are integrated to form a predetermined shape. It is configured to be possible.

The fourth board effect device 707 performs an effect of the game by operating. The fourth board effect device 707 is the shape of the character related to the effect of the gaming machine 10. In the game board 700, the fourth board effect device 707 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the display device 41 on the lower left side of the display device 41 during normal operation (when it is not movable) (for example, stored so that it cannot be seen). During operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the lower front side of the display device 41, and the lower front side of the display device 41 can be operated left and right. Note that the fourth board rendering device 707 may be capable of moving the weapon held by the character, and in addition to the horizontal movement, the vertical movement,
An operation of tilting the character may be possible.

The above is an example of the gaming board 700 of the gaming machine 10 in the third embodiment. Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
These are figures (the 1) which show an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment displays.

The display screen 708 includes two sets of decorative symbols (a large symbol group 709 and a small symbol group 710), a special figure 1 hold number display 711, a special figure 2 hold number display 712, a hold display 713, and a hold digest display 714.
And the reserved digest base display 715 and the notice display 716 are included in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 709 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 710 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 709 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 709 is displayed in a large size at a substantially central portion of the display device 41. Large design group 709
Includes a left symbol 709L, a middle symbol 709C, and a right symbol 709R. The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

In general, the large symbol group 709 starts to change in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and stops (including the temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. For this reason, in many cases, the large symbol group 709 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R, and waits for the middle symbol 709C to stop to allow a hit mode to be formed.

The small symbol group 710 is in charge of notifying the change display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 710 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 709. The small symbol group 710
Including left design, middle design and right design. The left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the small symbol group 710 on the display screen 708 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 hold number display 711 displays the reserved memory number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 712 displays the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 game. According to the display mode, the hold display 713 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game, and can notify the reliability (expected degree) of the game result for each hold memory. The reserved memory indicates the right to execute the special figure variation display game. For example, the hold display 713 is a hold storage display (corresponding to each hold storage (
The degree of reliability of the game result is notified by changing the display mode (character) of the on-hold storage display (for example, changing from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high). Note that the hold display 713 is replaced with a change in the display mode of the hold storage display by a game mode (for example, the character is set to a walking mode in normal times, and the character is set to a running mode when reliability is high). You may alert | report the reliability with respect to a result.

Depending on the display mode, the reserved digest display 714 can indicate the variation state of the special figure variation display game and notify the reliability of the game result. In FIG. 83, the pending digest display 714
Indicates that the special-figure display game is changing symbols. For example, the hold digest display 714 changes the display mode (character) of the hold storage display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, changing from a general character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high), so that the confidence in the game result is increased. Inform the degree. In addition, the hold digest display 714 is replaced with the change of the display mode of the hold storage display, and the action mode (for example, the character is set to the walking mode at normal time,
The reliability of the game result may be notified by making the character run in a running mode when the reliability is high.

The reserved digest base display 715 clearly indicates the position where the reserved digest display 714 is displayed. The reserved digest pedestal display 715 includes a character display and a pedestal display. In the character display, a character that is a motif of an effect performed by the gaming machine 10 is displayed. In FIG. 83, the character display displays a character like a tiger. The pedestal display displays a scaffold where the reserved storage display (character) corresponding to the reserved storage being digested and the character displayed by the character display are located.

The notice display 716 gives notice of an effect (a privilege to be given) that is performed in the hold memory in standby or the hold memory in digestion. The notice display 716 displays a treasure box and a bag, and an effect corresponding to an item (symbol) to be displayed when digesting the reserved memory in standby or the reserved memory in digestion (an aspect like a treasure box in FIG. 83) The effect corresponding to the item and the effect corresponding to the item having the aspect like the bag are performed. The notice display 716 is not displayed when the item is not stocked.

The item displayed in the notice display 716 is added when the package is opened at the start of digestion of the reserved storage (the stored storage display in the form of the character with the load) displayed in the form with the load. The package appears at a predetermined timing. The baggage is displayed on hold 713.
May appear at the timing of starting to display the hold storage display (at the start of display), or may appear from the middle.

Next, the relationship between the items that appear from the luggage and the effects that are performed (privileged privileges) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between an item appearing from a package and its content according to the third embodiment.

Items appearing from the luggage are patterns P1 to P5. The item of the pattern P1 is an item (symbol) having a shape like a skull. The item of the pattern P1 clearly indicates that it is a frustration (the effect of opening the package is unsuccessful (turning effect)). When an item of the pattern P1 appears from the package, the item is not stocked (added) in the notice display 716.

The item of the pattern P2 is an item having a shape like a heart. Pattern P2
Items in the production PT (either in the holding memory during digestion or the waiting storage in standby)
It is clearly stated that the PT acquisition effect is performed. For example, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to acquire the right to execute the effect by accumulating the effect PT to a predetermined value. When an item of the pattern P2 appears from the baggage, the notice display 716 stocks items having a heart-like form.

The item of the pattern P3 is an item having an aspect like a bag. The item of the pattern P3 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect is performed in either the reserved storage during digestion or the standby storage during standby. When an item of the pattern P3 appears from the parcel, the notice display 716 is stocked with an item in the form of a bag.

The item of the pattern P4 is an item (an item in the form of a push button) having a form indicating a push button (PB). The item of the pattern P4 uses a push button (with operation of the push button) in either the on-hold storage during digestion or the on-hold storage during standby (with operation of the push button). It is clearly shown that an effect (reminiscent of a plurality of variable display games being played) is performed. When an item of the pattern P4 appears from the luggage, the notice display 716 is stocked with an item that shows a push button. Note that the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button executed based on the item indicating the push button may be a dedicated effect different from the effect using the push button performed independently of the item.

The item of the pattern P5 is an item having an aspect like a treasure box. The item of the pattern P5 clearly indicates that the treasure box opening effect (the effect that the item appears from when the treasure box is opened) is performed in either the on-hold storage during digestion or the on-hold storage. When an item of the pattern P5 appears from the luggage, the notice display 716 is stocked with an item that looks like a treasure box.

Next, items appearing from the treasure chest will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between an item appearing from a treasure chest and its content in the third embodiment.
Items appearing from the treasure chest in opening the treasure chest include patterns P10 to P14. The item of the pattern P10 is an item having a shape like a skull. The item of the pattern P10 clearly indicates that it is a gas (does not develop from the treasure box opening effect).
When an item of the pattern P10 appears from the treasure box during digestion of the reserved memory (during execution of the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect related to the appearing item is not performed. .

The item of the pattern P11 is an item having a shape like a heart. Pattern P
Eleven items clearly indicate that the development will be an effect PT acquisition effect. If an item of the pattern P11 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), after the opening of the treasure box is finished, an effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure variation display game. Is done.

The item of the pattern P12 is an item having an aspect like a bag. Pattern P1
The item 2 clearly indicates that it will develop into a production PT acquisition production. When an item of pattern P12 appears from the treasure box during digestion of the reserved memory (during execution of the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, an effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure variation display game. Is done.

The item of the pattern P13 is an item that displays a continuation character. The item of the pattern P13 clearly indicates that it develops into a pseudo-continuous production. If an item of the pattern P13 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being digested (during execution of the special figure variation display game), the pseudo-continuous production is performed in the special figure fluctuation display game after the opening of the treasure box is finished. It is carried out.

The item of the pattern P14 is an item in a mode of displaying intense characters. The item of the pattern P14 clearly indicates that the reliability is high (for example, 60%). If an item of the pattern P14 appears from the treasure box while the reserved memory is being digested (during execution of the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the reliability is high in the special figure variation display game. Production is performed.

Next, an example of the effect of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 86 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a third diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram (No. 4) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

A display screen 717 shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a display screen when the symbol variation is stopped (when the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state where there is no item stocked in the notice display 716.
On the display screen 717, since there is no item stocked in the notice display 716, the notice display 716 is in a non-display state. On the display screen 717, since the symbol variation is stopped, the hold storage display is not displayed on the hold digest display 714. In addition, the display screen 717 shows that the hold storage display of the form with the load is positioned at the first (first) in the hold display 713, and that the item appears from the load when the next hold storage is started. It is clearly stated.

A display screen 718 shown in FIG. 86 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 717, and shows a state in which digestion of the reserved memory displayed in a state of having a baggage is started (a state in which symbol variation is started). Show. On the display screen 718, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 718, each hold storage display slides one from the state on the display screen 717, and the hold storage display of the form having the package located first in the hold display 713 is positioned in the hold digest display 714, It shows that the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the hold storage displayed in the form with the package is started.

A display screen 719 shown in FIG. 86 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 718, and shows a state in which an opening effect for opening the package is being executed. A display screen 719 is a reserved digest display 71.
4 is a state in which an item of pattern P4 (push button mode) appears from the hold storage display baggage displayed in FIG. 4, and the special figure variation display game of either the hold storage in digestion or the hold storage in standby Clearly shows that a pseudo-continuous production using a push button is performed. Further, on the display screen 719, by displaying a message “Thank you for the tribute!” From the characters constituting the reserved digest base display 715, it is clearly indicated that the item is an advantageous item for the player.

A display screen 720 shown in FIG. 87 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 719, in which an item that appears from the package is newly stocked in the notice display 716. Display screen 7
In 20, the notice display 716 is in the display state because an item to be stocked appears, and the notice display 716 in the display state displays an item in the form of a push button that appears from the package. And on the display screen 720, with the appearance of an item from the package, the mode of the hold storage display for displaying the hold memory during digestion is changed from the mode with the load to the mode without the load. Note that the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the push button in the state in the notice display 716 (does not accept the input).

A display screen 721 shown in FIG. 87 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 720, and is independent of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button for which the advance notice display 716 is notified in the special figure variable display game (independently). This shows a state where an effect using a push button is performed.

The display screen 721 includes an effect display 722 in the display content. The effect display 722 displays an effect executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the effect display 722 is
An image showing how the push button is pressed (an image that prompts the user to operate the push button), a message “Press!” (A message that prompts the user to operate the push button), and a timer that indicates the remaining time are displayed. Clarify that an effect using a push button in the display game (an effect of pressing the push button) is being executed. On the display screen 721, the stock state (stock item) of the notice display 716 has not changed from the stock state (stock item) of the notice display 716 on the display screen 720. As a result, the display screen 721 is not the effect that the effect display 722 is informing with the notice display 716,
That is, the effect using the push button being executed is unrelated to the item of the push button mode stocked in the notice display 716.

In the gaming machine 10, the player presses the push button while the display screen 721 is being displayed (when an effect using the push button is executed in the effect display 722 while the item of the push button is displayed in the notice display 716). ), Only the operation on the effect display 722 (input by pressing) is valid (priority is given to the effect using the push button displayed by the effect display 722). That is, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the item in the push button mode stocked in the notice display 716.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing in the state displayed in the notice display 716, and therefore does not cause a mix of operations. Therefore, the push button item is displayed on the notice display 716 while the item is displayed. There is no need to provide restrictions such as prohibiting the implementation of effects using push buttons that are performed independently. That is, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the degree of freedom of production (preventing the degree of freedom from being lowered) even during the advance notice, and can improve the interest.

Note that in this case, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the push button mode displayed on the notice display 716 (for example, gray scale) to clearly indicate that the input by pressing is invalid. Good.

A display screen 723 shown in FIG. 87 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 721, and shows a state in which the special figure variation display game is finished and the symbol fluctuation is stopped.
In the display screen 723, the special effect is not performed in which the item stocked in the notice display 716 in the special figure change display game being executed on the display screen 721 is not noticed (the stock item is not consumed). Since the variable display game is over, the stock state of the notice display 716 is the same stock state as the display screen 721.

A display screen 724 shown in FIG. 88 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 723, and shows a state in which digestion of a new reserved memory is started (a state in which variation starts). On the display screen 724, each hold storage display slides from the state on the display screen 723, and the hold storage display that is positioned first in the hold display 713 on the display screen 723 is positioned in the hold digest display 714,
A special figure variation display game corresponding to the hold storage display has been started.

The display screen 725 shown in FIG. 88 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 724, and a state in which an effect corresponding to the item (item in the form of a push button) stocked in the notice display 716 is started. Indicates.

On the display screen 725, items in the form of push buttons stocked in the notice display 716 are moving from the notice display 716 toward the center of the screen while expanding. Thereby, the display screen 725 clearly indicates that the effect to be started is an effect (a pseudo-continuous effect using the push button) that the item in the form of the push button has foretold.

A display screen 726 shown in FIG. 88 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 725 and is in a state where an effect corresponding to the item (item in the form of a push button) stocked in the notice display 716 is being executed. Indicates.

On the display screen 726, as an effect display 722, an image showing a state where the push button is pressed, a message “Press!” And a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and an effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game. The fact that (the push button is pressed) is being executed. On the display screen 726, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 gives a notice is executed (the stock item is consumed), and the notice display 7 is displayed.
As the item stocked at 16 disappears, the notice display 716 is hidden.

Next, when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not input in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button executed based on the push button item stocked in the notice display 716 An example of the contents of the production performed in the following will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of contents of effects performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine 10 does not perform an input by pressing the push button in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button (when it is not pressed). (Normal pseudo-ream) is executed, and when an input is made by pressing a push button in an effect using a push button, a pseudo-ream (dedicated pseudo-ream) prepared exclusively for a pseudo-ream effect using a push button is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button for selecting the type of the pseudo-ream in the pseudo-ream effect using the push button.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the gaming machine 10 performs high-speed fluctuation (display screen) when no input is made by pressing the push button in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button (when the push button is not pressed). The change shown in 720) is continued, and if an input is made by pressing the push button in an effect using the push button, a pseudo-ream is executed. That is, gaming machine 1
0 is used to select whether to execute the pseudo-continuous effect in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button.

Next, a process for setting a package to appear on the hold storage display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
FIG. 0 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the package setting process in the third embodiment.
The package setting process is a process that is performed when a new hold memory is generated by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300, that is, when a winning command indicating that a new hold memory has been received is received. The package setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process.

[Step D300] The control unit produces an effect to be executed in the reserved memory newly generated based on the winning command (the effect to execute the effect notified as the advance notice in the special-fluctuation display game). It is determined whether or not. The control unit proceeds to step D301 when it is determined to execute the effect subject to the notice, and proceeds to step D307 when it is determined not to execute the effect subject to the notice.

[Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not there is a hold memory displayed in a form having a load in the hold memory. The control unit proceeds to step D302 when it is determined that there is a reserved memory displayed in the form with a package, and proceeds to step D302 when it is determined that there is no reserved memory displayed in the form of a character with a package. Proceed to

[Step D302] The control unit determines whether it is possible to replace the contents of the hold-stored baggage displayed in the form with the baggage. For example, the control unit determines that the replacement is possible when the pattern P1 is set as the contents of the luggage, and determines that the replacement is not possible when the contents other than the pattern P1 are set as the contents. A priority is set for each pattern, and the priority of the pattern before replacement is compared with the priority of the pattern after replacement, and it is determined that replacement is possible when the priority of the pattern after replacement is high. May be.

When the control unit determines that the contents of the package can be replaced, the control unit proceeds to step D303,
If it is determined that the contents of the package cannot be replaced, the process proceeds to step D304.
[Step D303] The control unit replaces the contents of the package from the pattern P1 with an item pattern corresponding to an effect to be notified by the newly generated on-hold storage.

[Step D304] The control unit sets a package as the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to any of the hold memories (the newly generated hold memory or the waiting hold memory) (the package is set as the display mode of the hold memory display). Set the character you have).

[Step D305] The control unit sets, as the contents of the package set in step D304, an item pattern corresponding to the effect subject to the advance notice executed by the newly generated on-hold storage.

[Step D306] The control unit determines whether or not the package has been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage. When it is determined that the package has not been set as the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory, the control unit proceeds to step D307 and displays the hold memory display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory. If it is determined that the package has already been set, the package setting process is terminated.

[Step D307] The control unit determines whether it is a generation timing of a baggage with a skull. For example, the control unit generates a random number and determines that it is the generation timing of a baggage with a skull when the random number indicates a predetermined value.

When the control unit determines that it is the generation timing of the baggage with a skull, step D30 is performed.
Proceeding to 8, the package setting process is terminated when it is determined that it is not time to generate a skull-loaded package.

[Step D308] The control unit sets a package as the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory (sets the character with the package as the display mode of the hold memory display).

[Step D309] The control unit sets the pattern P1 or the pattern P5 (skull treasure chest) as the contents of the package set in step D304, and ends the package setting process.

The above is the third embodiment. In this way, the game machine 10 predicts the progress of the production by notifying in advance that the presentation using the push button in the notice display 716 is performed in either the on-hold storage during digestion or the on-hold storage during standby. And maintain and improve expectations.

The gaming machine 10 uses different hold memory for the hold memory for causing the item to appear and the hold memory for executing the effect notified by the item so that the player cannot grasp the timing when the effect notified by the item occurs. According to this, the gaming machine 10 gives a sense of expectation that an effect that has been notified in advance by an item may occur even when the reserved memory that is digested before the reserved memory that performs the effect that has been notified in advance is consumed. Can do. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the expectation even for effects that are not subject to notice.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can prevent an oversight of a production (forgetting an operation) and improve an interest by giving a prior notice that an effect using a push button is started in advance by a notice display 716.

Note that although the gaming machine 10 has been described as not accepting an input by pressing a push button item in the notice display 716, the present invention is not limited thereto. The gaming machine 10 may invalidate the input by pressing during the execution of the effect using the push button that is performed irrespective of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button, and if the input by pressing at other timing is performed. An input may be received as a reservation input before the pseudo-continuous production starts. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can suppress missing an effect due to forgetting to press it.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, effects performed in Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the first modification of the third embodiment.

A display screen 727 shown in FIG. 91 (1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (during execution of a variation display game). On the display screen 727, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed.

A display screen 728 shown in FIG. 91 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 727 and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L temporarily stops. On the display screen 728, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. That is, the display screen 72
8 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped.

A display screen 729 shown in FIG. 91 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state where the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. In display screen 729, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 70
9R fluctuates at high speed, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at “5”, and the symbol swings.

A display screen 730 shown in FIG. 92 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 729, and shows a state where an effect is generated in the left symbol 709L.
On the display screen 730, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. In addition, on the display screen 730, an effect indicating the image of the push button and the generation of the effect is displayed as the effect display 722 in a portion superimposed with the temporarily stopped left symbol 709 </ b> L (identifier).

A display screen 731 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 730 and shows a state in which an effect using a push button is started.
On the display screen 731, as an effect display 722, an image showing a state where the push button is pressed, a message “Press!” And a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and an effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game. The fact that (the push button is pressed) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in the first modification of the third embodiment. Generally, when a symbol is temporarily stopped in a variable display game, the player puts the temporarily stopped drawing into view (viewing). Therefore, immediately after the temporary stop, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol, and uses the push button after notifying that the effect using the push button is to be performed. By starting the production, the player can be surely recognized that the production using the push button is started. Thereby, gaming machine 1
0 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect using the push button and can improve the interest.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the figure of the symbol temporarily stopped after the temporary stop (changed to the symbol displaying the push button), and the effect using the push button is performed. Started. In the second modification of the third embodiment, the symbol that is changing is replaced with a symbol that displays a push button (for example, a symbol in which a push button is superimposed on the front side of a number), and a symbol that displays a push button is displayed. After temporarily stopping, the production using the push button is started.

Here, an effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the second modification of the third embodiment.

A display screen 732 shown in FIG. 93 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 728 and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L temporarily stops. On the display screen 732, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. In addition, on the display screen 732, the left symbol 709L (the left symbol 709L in which the symbol is replaced with the symbol displaying the push button) in which the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the symbol composing the symbol is about to be temporarily stopped (low speed). Fluctuating). That is, the display screen 732 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to temporarily stop in a state where the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

A display screen 733 shown in FIG. 93 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 732, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On display screen 733, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 70
9R fluctuates at high speed, and the left symbol 709L temporarily stops and swings in a state where the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numerals constituting the symbol.

A display screen 734 shown in FIG. 93 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 733 and shows a state in which an effect using a push button is started.
On the display screen 734, as an effect display 722, an image showing a state where the push button is pressed, a message “Press!” And a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and an effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. The fact that (the push button is pressed) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment. Generally, in a variable display game, a player puts a drawing to be temporarily stopped into view (views). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the number constituting the symbol to be temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop (low speed fluctuation state), and the push button on the front side of the number constituting the symbol. By temporarily stopping with the image displayed and informing that the effect using the push button is to be performed, starting the effect using the push button, the player can more reliably recognize that the effect using the push button starts. Can be made. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect using the push button, and can improve the interest.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, effects performed in the third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a diagram (No. 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 3) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment.

First, the flow of production will be described using the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. 94 is an example of the pseudo-continuous effect executed by the gaming machine 10, and shows the flow of the effect when three times of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

The gaming machine 10 uses BGM (Back Ground Music) at the timing t10 as shown in FIG.
As a result, the Nth variation display game is started using the music A. Then, the gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (the first pseudo-ream) when the Nth variable display game is started. An example of a display screen during the fluctuating display effect (first pseudo-continuation) will be described with reference to a display screen 735 in FIG. 95 (1) and a display screen 736 in FIG. 95 (2).

A display screen 735 shown in FIG. 95 (1) shows a display screen during the fluctuating display effect (the first pseudo-continuation). On the display screen 735, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. The gaming machine 10 then displays the change display effect being executed on the display screen 735 in accordance with B.
GM is played at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 736 shown in FIG. 95 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 735, and shows a display screen during a variable display effect (the first pseudo-continuation). On the display screen 736, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C is at high speed fluctuation. is doing. That is, the display screen 73
6 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 736, and the second board effect device 705L,
705R is operated, and the expectation of the occurrence of reach is raised, and the interest is improved.

When the gaming machine 10 enters the two-pattern temporary stop state at the timing t11 in the variable display effect (the first pseudo-ream), the game machine 10 starts an effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that informs the player whether or not to continue the pseudo-ream. . At this time, the gaming machine 10 reduces the volume while playing the music A to mute (silence), and plays SE (Sound Effect) used for the pseudo-continuous effect.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuation effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the pseudo-continuation is continued when the pseudo-continuation is continued, and shifts to a state in which the three symbols are rapidly changed (variation display state). .
On the other hand, if the game machine 10 does not continue the pseudo-ream, the gaming machine 10 notifies the fact that the pseudo-ream is not continued and shifts to a result derivation display for deriving the result of the variable display game.

A display screen 73 in FIG. 95 (3) for a screen display example during a two-pattern temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect).
7 for explanation.
A display screen 737 shown in FIG. 95 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 736, and shows a display screen during a two-design temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect). On the display screen 737, the left symbol 709L
Is temporarily stopped at the symbol “7”, the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol “6”, and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 keeps the BGM muted in addition to the pseudo continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 737 and allows the player to grasp that the effect is occurring by flowing SE instead of the BGM. To improve interests.

When the gaming machine 10 informs that the quasi-continuation will be continued at timing t12,
Second time). The gaming machine 10 stops the playback of the SE and mutes the music A (BGM).
Start (turn back to) the sound volume at the specified volume. Examples of the display screen during the fluctuating display effect (pseudo-continuous second time), display screen 738 in FIG. 96 (1), display screen 739 in FIG.
This will be described with reference to a display screen 740 of 6 (3).

A display screen 738 shown in FIG. 96 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 737, and shows a display screen during a variable display effect (the second pseudo-continuation). On the display screen 738, as the effect display 722, a character like a tiger and a message “game is coming!” Are displayed, and the effect of the special figure variation display game is continued (revariation starts). It is clearly stated. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has the second board effect device 70 in addition to the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 738.
By making 5L and 705R work and changing the production, we are trying to improve interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being played on the display screen 737 and is in a mute state.
GM is played at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 739 shown in FIG. 96 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 738, and shows a display screen during a variable display effect (the second pseudo-continuation). On the display screen 739, the left symbol 709L,
The middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. The gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 739.

A display screen 740 shown in FIG. 96 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 739, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (the second pseudo-continuation). On the display screen 740, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C is at high speed fluctuation. is doing. That is, the display screen 74
0 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 740, and the second board effect device 705L,
705R is operated, and the expectation of the occurrence of reach is raised, and the interest is improved.

When the gaming machine 10 enters the two-pattern temporary stop state at the timing t13 in the variable display effect (the second time in the pseudo-continuation), the game machine 10 starts the pseudo-continuous effect. At this time, the gaming machine 10 is a song A (BGM)
The sound is muted (silenced) by reducing the sound volume while playing, and the SE used for the pseudo-continuous effect is played. A display screen 74 in FIG. 97 (1) for a screen display example during a two-pattern temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect).
1 will be used for explanation.

A display screen 741 shown in FIG. 97 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 740, and shows a display screen in a two-design temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect).
On the display screen 741, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol “7”, and the right symbol 709 is displayed.
R temporarily stops at the symbol “6”, and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 puts the BGM in a mute state in conjunction with the pseudo continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 741.
By playing SE instead of GM, it is possible to grasp that the production is occurring, give a sense of expectation, and improve the interest.

When the gaming machine 10 informs that the quasi-continuation is continued at the timing t14,
Execute the third time). The gaming machine 10 stops the playback of the SE and mutes the music A (BGM).
Start playing at a predetermined volume (return to the original volume). An example of the display screen during the fluctuating display effect (the third pseudo-continuation) will be described with reference to the display screen 742 in FIG. 97 (2) and the display screen 743 in FIG. 97 (3).

A display screen 742 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 741, and shows a display screen during a variable display effect (pseudo-continuous third time). On the display screen 742, a character such as a tiger and a message “I will decide next!” Are displayed as the effect display 722, and the effect of the special figure variation display game continues (revariation starts). Is specified. Also,
The gaming machine 10 uses the second board effect device 705 in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 742.
L and 705R are operated, and the entertainment is improved by changing the production. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE playing on the display screen 741, and the BG that has been muted
M is flowing at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 743 shown in FIG. 97 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 742, and shows a display screen during a variable display effect (the second pseudo-continuation). On the display screen 743, the left symbol 709L,
The middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. The gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 743.

The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time) until timing t15, derives the result of the variable display game (result derivation display), and displays the result display for a predetermined time, the Nth special figure variable display game is displayed. finish.

The above is the flow of effects in the third modification of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10
In the case where SE and BGM are not mixed when reproducing SE, BGM is not in a stopped state, but BGM is in a mute state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 is S
When the volume of the BGM is increased after the playback of E is finished, the BGM can be heard from the playback position that has elapsed by the playback time of SE. In this way, BGM can be heard from the playback position where it is desired to pass the SE playback time, so that the gaming machine 10 can prevent the BGM from being sliced, suppress the sense of incongruity felt by the player, and improve the interest. it can.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. First, a decorative design used in Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example of a decorative design in the fourth modification of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B as the decorative symbol used for each symbol of the large symbol group 709. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol used mainly, and the decorative symbol B is a decorative symbol used as a slave (decorative symbol used only in a specific case). More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol B is used only when a big hit is derived in a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) generated by winning the special figure 2 start opening. It is a pattern that is.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750. The symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750 are distinguishable from other symbols by different display modes.

The symbol 744 is a symbol for displaying a numeral “1” composed of a numeral element (identifier) having a distinctiveness as a symbol by the numeral “1”. The symbol 745 is a symbol for displaying a numeral “2” composed of numeral elements having identification as a symbol by the numeral “2”. The symbol 746 is a symbol that displays a numeral “3” composed of numeral elements having identification as a symbol by the numeral “3”. The symbol 747 is a symbol for displaying the numeral “4” composed of numeral elements having identification as a symbol by the numeral “4”. The symbol 748 is a symbol for displaying the numeral “5” composed of numeral elements having identification as a symbol by the numeral “5”. Design 74
Reference numeral 9 denotes a symbol for displaying a numeral “6” composed of a numeral element having identification as a symbol by the numeral “6”. The symbol 750 is a symbol for displaying a numeral “7” composed of numeral elements having a distinctiveness as a symbol by the numeral “7”.

The decorative symbol B is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the numeric element in the decorative symbol A. For example, the decorative element A is a character element indicating that the numerical element in the decorative symbol A is higher in value than the decorative symbol A (
(Value conversion identifier) is added (a character element is added to the symbol 750). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) has a relatively higher value than the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol A (symbol 750).

The decorative design B includes a design 751. The symbol 751 is a character element indicating that the value is higher than the symbol 750 having only the numerical element of the number “7” by the character “pole” and the number element (identifier) having the distinguishability as the symbol by the number “7”. It is a pattern composed of

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the game state in which the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B are used will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating symbols used in the gaming state according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 99, the gaming machine 10 is different in the symbols used in the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) generated by winning the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. ing.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the fluctuation and temporary stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are constituted by the decorative symbols A. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has the symbols 744, 745, 744, 745, and the symbols in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 1 variable display game.
By displaying 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order, high-speed fluctuation is performed,
Left design 709L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744,745,746,74
Any one of 7, 748, 749, and 750 is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped are configured as decorative symbols A. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has the left symbol 7 in the special figure 1 variable display game.
09L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744,745,746,747,74
Either 8, 749, or 750 is stopped, and the derivation result is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the fluctuation and temporary stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are constituted by the decorative symbols A. That is, the gaming machine 10 has symbols 744, 745, and 746 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game.
, 747, 748, 749, 750 are displayed in order, and high-speed fluctuation is performed. The symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 7 are displayed on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.
One of 48, 749, and 750 is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped are constituted by the decorative symbols A and B. That is, the gaming machine 10 has symbols 744, 745, and 74 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game.
Any one of 6,747,748,749,750,751 is stopped, and the derivation result is displayed.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special symbol 2 variable display game, the symbol 744 is displayed on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.
745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 are displayed in order to cause high-speed fluctuation, and the symbols 744, 745, and 74 are displayed on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.
After temporarily stopping any one of 6,747,748,749,750, the symbol 751 is stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the symbols 744, 745, and 746 are displayed on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.
, 747, 748, 749, 750 are displayed in order, and high-speed fluctuation is performed. The symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 7 are displayed on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.
After temporarily stopping any of 48, 749, 750, the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R,
Any one of symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped in the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is displayed.

Hereinafter, in the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 2 variable display game, it is assumed that a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is derived instead of the big hit consisting of the symbol 750. That is, gaming machine 1
In the case of 0, it is assumed that the big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A (the symbol has no character element) during the fluctuation and when it is stopped, and only when the special figure 2 variable display game uses the symbol 751 to derive the jackpot. By using design B (designed with character elements), it is possible to easily grasp that the big hit consisting of design 751 is a special big hit (high value jackpot), improve the understanding of the game, and improve the interest Can do.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, since the decorative symbol A used during the fluctuation and during the stop is also used in the special figure 2 variable display game, the video and the like used during the fluctuation and the stop are displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game. Can be shared with the video, etc., and the increase in capacity, etc., and the labor involved in preparing the video can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, there will be described a case where a big hit consisting of symbol 750 is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and a case where a big hit consisting of symbol 751 is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 100 is a special map 1 variation display game in the modification 4 of the third embodiment.
It is a figure which shows a comparison with the case where "777" is derived | led-out and the case where "777" is derived | led-out in a special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

First, a case where a big hit consisting of symbols 750 is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 has a collective display device “●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●” in the special figure 1 variable display game.
Is derived, a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 is derived. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbols 750, the gaming machine 10 gives “4R” as a privilege to the player. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. Derive a big hit.

Next, the case of deriving the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. As for the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the collective display device is “●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●”
Is derived, the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived. When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751, the game machine 10 gives “16R” as a privilege to the player (the symbol 75
A value higher than the big hit of “777” consisting of 0). The gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 70
9L, right symbol 709R, and middle symbol 709C temporarily stop symbol 750, then left symbol 7
The symbol 750 temporarily stopped at 09L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C is symbol 751.
The jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived by replacing with.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when different values (rounds) are given by symbols displaying the same identifier, the same mode symbols are used in the temporary stop mode (result derivation process), and only at the time of derivation of the results. Symbols of different modes (symbol 750, symbol 75) displaying the same identifier
By using 1), it is possible to easily grasp that the value of the jackpot made up of each symbol is different, to improve the understanding of the game, and to improve the interest.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the value of the jackpot consisting of a symbol having the number “7” according to the type of the variable display game being executed (the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, the jackpot lighting pattern (“●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●”) composed of symbols having a number “7” that gives different values in the collective display device can be shared.

Next, the flow of effects in the case of deriving a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

A display screen 752 shown in FIG. 101 (1) is a display screen when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (when the fluctuation display game is stopped), and shows a state before the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started. Display screen 752
The left symbol 709L is stopped at “7”, the middle symbol 709C is “3”, and the right symbol 709R is “7”. On the display screen 752, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 indicates “3”, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 indicates “0”, and there is only a reserved memory that triggers the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. Specified that the special figure 1 variable display game will be performed at the time of the next reserved memory digestion.

A display screen 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 752, and shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 753, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 753, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 that displayed “3” on the display screen 752 displays “2”, and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 1 variable display game. It is shown that.

A display screen 754 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 753, and shows a state in which three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On display screen 754, left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at symbol 750 ("7"), middle symbol 709C at symbol 750 ("7"), right symbol 709R at symbol 750 ("7"), and a big hit is derived. It shows the situation just before.

A display screen 755 shown in FIG. 101 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 754, and shows a state where three symbols are stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 755, the left symbol 709L stops at symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C stops at symbol 750 ("7"), the right symbol 709R stops at symbol 750 ("7"), and symbol 750
A jackpot consisting of is derived.

Next, the flow of effects in the case of deriving the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram (No. 2) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

A display screen 756 shown in FIG. 102 (1) is a display screen during the stoppage of symbol fluctuation (while the fluctuation display game is stopped), and shows a state before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started. Display screen 756
The left symbol 709L is stopped at “7”, the middle symbol 709C is “3”, and the right symbol 709R is “7”. On the display screen 756, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 indicates “0”, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 indicates “3”, and there is only a hold memory that triggers the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. Specified that the special figure 2 variable display game will be performed at the time of the next reserved memory digestion.

A display screen 757 shown in FIG. 102 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 756, and shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 757, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 757, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 that displayed “3” on the display screen 756 displays “2”, and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 2 variable display game. It is shown that.

A display screen 758 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 757, and shows a state where three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 758, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C at symbol 750 ("7"), and the right symbol 709R at symbol 750 ("7"). It shows the situation just before. In addition, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R while displaying the display screen 758, and changes the effect so as to raise the expectation that further changes will occur and improve the interest. Yes.

A display screen 759 shown in FIG. 102 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 758, and shows a state where three symbols are stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 759, the left symbol 709L has been replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, the middle symbol 709C has been replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, and the right symbol 709R has been replaced with the symbol 750 to the symbol 751. The big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is derived.

The above is the modification 4 of the third embodiment. Note that the decorative symbol B is a symbol used only in the case of deriving a big hit in the special symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol 2 fluctuation display game) generated by winning the special figure 2 starting opening. Absent. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display the decorative symbol A (even when the special figure 2 variable display game is out of play.
Instead of the symbol 750), a decorative symbol B (symbol 751) may be used.

In the gaming machine 10, the special figure 2 variable display game has been described as not having a big hit consisting of the symbol 750, but the game machine 10 is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to be able to derive a big hit consisting of symbols 750 in addition to the big hit consisting of symbols 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 5 of the third embodiment will be described. In the variation 4 of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game can generate a jackpot of low value consisting of the symbol 750, and the special figure 2
In the variable display game, the embodiment in which a high value jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 can be generated has been described. In the modified example 5 of the third embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, it is possible to generate a big hit consisting of a low-value symbol 750 and a big hit consisting of a high-value symbol 751 respectively. Will be described.

First, symbols used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating symbols used in the gaming state according to the fifth modification of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 10 uses the same symbols for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.
In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the fluctuation and temporary stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are constituted by the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 74 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special symbol 1 variation display game and the special symbol 2 variation display game.
9 and 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709 are displayed.
R, middle symbol 709C temporarily stops any of symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 and displays the temporary stop state.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped are constituted by the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, gaming machine 10
Is a left symbol 709L, a right symbol 709R, a middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game.
One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, and 751 is stopped and the derivation result is displayed.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, the left symbol 7
09L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744,745,746,747,74
By displaying 8,749,750 in order, high-speed fluctuation is performed, and the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749, 744L, 745,746,747,748,749,
After temporarily stopping any of 750, left symbol 709L, right symbol 709R, middle symbol 709C
The symbol 751 is stopped.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the symbols 744, 745, and 746 are displayed on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in other cases (when the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived).
By displaying 747, 748, 749, 750 in order, high-speed fluctuation occurs, and the left symbol 7
09L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744,745,746,747,74
After temporarily stopping any one of 8, 749 and 750, the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C are stopped on any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749 and 750, and the derivation result Is displayed.

Next, a case where a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 is derived and a case where a jackpot consisting of symbols 751 is derived will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a comparison of two jackpots in Modification 5 of the third embodiment.

First, the jackpot consisting of the symbols 750 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbols 750, the gaming machine 10 gives “4R” as a privilege to the player. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C,
The big symbol consisting of the symbol 750 is derived by stopping the symbol 750 on the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C.

Next, the jackpot made up of the symbols 751 derived from the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751, it gives “16R” as a privilege to the player. The gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 709L,
After temporarily stopping the symbol 750 on the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol 709L
By replacing the symbol 750 temporarily stopped by the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C with the symbol 751, a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is derived.

The above is the modification 5 of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped in each of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ("
777 "), it is possible to generate a big hit consisting of a low-value symbol 750 and a big hit consisting of a high-value symbol 751, thereby suppressing an increase in image capacity, Big hit variations can be increased. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the production until the final stage of the production (even after the temporary stop).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol B (the symbol on which the character element is attached) only at the time of stopping when the big hit is derived, so that the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is a special big hit (a high value big hit). Can be easily grasped, the degree of understanding of the game can be improved, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described. In the modified examples 4 and 5 of the third embodiment, the embodiment in which the decorative design composed only of the numerical elements is used at the time of change and temporary stop has been described. In a sixth modification of the third embodiment, a case will be described in which a pattern including a numeric element and a character element is used. FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating a transition of the symbol pattern of the decorative symbol in the variable display game according to Modification 6 of the third embodiment. In addition, here, it demonstrates using the symbol which displays "7" as a representative.

As shown in FIG. 105, the gaming machine 10 has the left symbol 7 when the symbol is stopped (before the change is started).
Character design 760 (decoration design C) is used as 09L, middle design 709C, and right design 709R. The decorative symbol C includes a character element having distinctiveness as a symbol by a character (for example, a character like a tiger in a symbol displaying the numeral “7”), and a numeric element having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number. It is a pattern comprised including.

When the gaming machine 10 starts changing the symbols, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 70
The symbol used as 9R is changed from the character symbol 760 (decoration symbol C) to the character symbol 761 (decoration symbol D). The decorative symbol D has a base (fan) having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a pattern (for example, a character pattern like a tiger in a symbol displaying the number “7”), and has a distinctiveness as a symbol by a number. It is a pattern comprised including a numerical element.

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the temporary stop state using the character symbol 761 (decoration symbol D) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R, and then is derived in the result derivation display (stopped state). Depending on the result, left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R
The design used as is changed from the decorative design D to the decorative design C, the decorative design A, or the decorative design B.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 determines the left symbol 709L and the middle symbol 709C when deriving the deviation.
, The symbol is changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C as the right symbol 709R, and the jackpot (for example, 4
R) is derived as a left symbol 709L, a middle symbol 709C, and a right symbol 709R, the symbol is changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol A, and when a high value jackpot (for example, 16R) is derived, the left symbol 709L, The symbol is changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol B as the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R.

According to this, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B only at the time of stopping when deriving a big hit, the derived result can be grasped by the symbol pattern of the stopped symbol, and the degree of understanding of the game is increased. Can be improved and interesting.

Further, the gaming machine 10 starts from a state where the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) is temporarily stopped in a big hit mode (when the big hit is suggested), from a big hit consisting of a low value symbol 750 and a high value symbol 751. By making it possible to generate a big hit, it is possible to increase the variation of the big hit while suppressing an increase in image capacity and the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 (until the final stage of production)
It is possible to maintain interest in the player's performance (even after a temporary stop).

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modifications 1 to 6) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and an operation means (push button 25).
And control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operation means can accept a predetermined operation. The control means performs the second operation effect (display) while executing the reservation effect (display of the item of the pattern P4 on the notice display 716) for reserving the first operation effect (the effect display 722 of the display screen 726) accompanied by the operation of the operation means. When the effect display 722) on the screen 721 is made executable and the operation of the operating means is accepted during the execution of the reservation effect and the second operation effect, the second operation effect is given priority among the first operation effect and the second operation effect. And run.

(2) When the control means in (1) accepts the operation of the operation means at the timing when the reservation effect is being performed and the second operation effect is not being executed, the accepted operation is the operation after the start of the first operation effect. Accept as a reservation operation to reserve as.

(3) The control means of (1) changes the aspect of the reservation effect while executing the reservation effect and the second operation effect.
(4) The display means of (1) displays a pending storage indicating the right to execute the game, and the control means
When there is a game in which the first operation effect to be reserved is performed in the hold memory, the display means displays the fact that the first operation effect is performed in any of the games in the hold memory (display) Screen 719).

(5) The control means of (4) performs the reservation effect using the hold memory for executing the game before the hold memory for executing the game in which the first operation effect is performed.
(6) In the reservation effect, the control means of (5) changes the display mode of the hold memory for executing the game first (display screen 719), so that the first operation effect is generated in any game in the hold memory. It is displayed on the display means what will be done.

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and operation means (push button 25).
And control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operation means can accept a predetermined operation. The control means is identification information (left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R) in the game.
When the operation effect accompanied by the operation by the operation means is displayed on the display means after the identification information is variably displayed, after the display mode indicating the operation means is displayed at the position corresponding to the identification information, the operation effect is displayed. Control to start.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100,
Production control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game).
When the BGM is played in the game, the control means performs the effect of outputting the sound effect in the game, while the sound effect is being output, the BGM sound volume is muted, and after the sound effect has been output, the BGM sound volume is turned off. Control to return from the mute state.

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100,
Production control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game).
The control means variably displays the first identification information (decorative symbol A) corresponding to the first value (4R big hit) in the game result derivation process (during change / temporary stop), and when the game result is derived ( The second value (16 when the first value is larger than the first value) in the first identification information (decorative pattern A) at the stop)
A conversion identifier (character element) to be converted into R jackpot is assigned, and a display for stopping and displaying the second identification information (decorative pattern B) corresponding to the second value is displayed on the display means.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a first diagram illustrating an example of a display screen according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the display screen is a screen composed of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41. In principle, a different code is assigned to each different display content.

A display screen 800 shown in FIG. 106 (1) is a display screen during symbol stop, similar to the display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1) described above, and the symbols are stopped and displayed before the start of change in the change display game. . The display screen 800 includes, as display elements, a large symbol group 801, a small symbol group 802,
A special figure 1 hold number display 803, a special figure 2 hold number display 804, a hold display 805, and a hold digest display 806 are displayed. Details of these display elements are the same as those of the display screen 500 shown in FIG. After the display screen 800 is displayed, the gaming machine 10 starts the next variation display.

A display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. A display screen 810 is a screen after the display screen 800 (a screen to be displayed later in time), and is a screen during fluctuation display (during three symbol fluctuations). Details of the display screen 810 are the same as those of the display screen 510 shown in FIG.

A display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) is a display screen when the reach effect is generated after the start of the variable display, similarly to the display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63 (3) described above. A display screen 811 is a screen after the display screen 810, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols are “3”. In this display screen 811, unlike the above-described display screen 511, the special figure 1 hold number display 803 indicates that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 game is “4” due to the occurrence of a new start figure winning prize in the variable display.
The hold display 805 indicates that the hold storage number is “4”.

Further, for example, the above-described overflow switch signal is output during the transition from the display screen 810 to the display screen 811. In response to this, on the display screen 811, an error notification image that prompts the player or the like to remove the ball from the lower plate 23. 807 is displayed. In addition, if an error (including abnormalities and fraud detected by the sensors and switches described above) including the opening of the glass frame occurs,
The game control device 100 uses the effect command setting process provided at various points in the program of the game control device 100 as described above to make the error information a command (specifically, a single-shot command). (As an error / unauthorized command) and transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 receives and analyzes the command from the game control device 100 in the above-described steps D22, 23, 27, etc., and operates according to the command (if there is an error relationship, the corresponding error display). And error notification including error notification sound output). In addition, there may be an error in which the production control device 300 uniquely determines the occurrence of an error and performs error notification. Thus, an error notification image 807 is also displayed as one of the error notifications realized by the effect control device 300.

The error notification image 807 is, for example, an image including the characters “please remove the ball”, and has priority over other images such as the large symbol group 801 at a position where the display position partially overlaps with the large symbol group 801, for example. (With a high display priority). That is, the error notification image 8
07 is displayed on the near side of the large symbol group 801 so as to partially hide the large symbol group 801, for example, and on this display screen 811, the entire error notification image 807 is viewed by an observer (player, game shop clerk, etc.). ) Is visible.

In addition, although concealing is concealing, it is not restricted to the aspect which makes a back side image (image with a relatively low display priority) invisible completely, The aspect which makes a back side image difficult to visually recognize May be included. For example, the error notification image 807 is displayed in a translucent manner, and the error notification image 80 is displayed.
The image on the back side where the display position overlaps with 7 (in this case, a part of the large symbol group 801) may be thinly seen. In addition, the error notification image 807 may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with other images such as the large symbol group 801. In this case, the front-to-back relationship with other images that do not overlap (display priority relationship) is naturally limited. Not. In any case, the error notification image 807 is displayed so that the visibility of the entire image is basically secured except when a specific effect described later is performed.

In addition, as an example of error notification for displaying an error notification image, the case of a lower plate overflow has been described as an example. However, other types of errors (including abnormality and fraud) are also displayed in the same manner.
For example, in order to urge the player to left-hand when a left-handed state where a game ball is to be placed on the left side of the game area and a right-handed state (a kind of abnormality) is detected in reverse The display of the notification image to be performed is also included.

A display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106 (4) is a display screen for a cut-in effect during a reach effect. A display screen 812 is a screen after the display screen 811 and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols are “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined expectation level with the cut-in display 813 (cut-in effect) for the change display during the reach effect. This display screen 812
Then, the large symbol group 801 is not overlapped with the cut-in display 813 as much as possible.
01 is displayed relatively small at the position of the upper left corner.

The cut-in display 813 of this specific example is an image group composed of a character 814 like a rocket, a character 815 (character like a tiger) riding on a rocket, and a background, and produces a predetermined expectation. The effect of displaying the cut-in display 813 is an effect of a strong notice (a notice with a relatively high expectation level that is a big hit) that is prioritized over an error display (an error display that notifies at least a weak error with low importance). It is an example of (specific production). In the specific example of this cut-in display 813, a large rocket-like character 814 appears in a dark background image displayed so as to cover a wide range of the screen (display area of the display device 41). By displaying the character 815 (character like a tiger) riding on the rocket, it is suggested to the player that the expectation level that is a big hit is particularly high. In this case, the expectation is high only by the appearance of a character 814 such as a large rocket, and when the character 815 (character like a tiger) is on the rocket, the expectation may be further increased. Good.

In the present embodiment, the image displayed in the strong notice effect (specific effect) as described above is prioritized over the error display (at least an error display for notifying a weak error with low importance) (the display priority is higher). Display in high state. That is, the cut-in display 813 (character 81
4 and characters 815 and their background images) are displayed in front of the error notification image 807 so as to hide part or all of the error notification image 807, and this display screen 8
In the example of 12, the entire cut-in display 813 is visible to an observer (a player, a shop clerk, etc.).

Note that concealing means concealing, but as described above, the image on the back side is not limited to a mode in which the image on the back side (image with relatively low display priority) is completely invisible. An aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize may be included. For example, the cut-in display 813 is displayed in a translucent manner (however, it is preferable that the transparency is low), and the image on the back side where the display position overlaps with the cut-in display 813 (in this case, a part of the error notification image 807, etc.) It is good also as a state which can be seen through thinly.

The gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 on the display screens 811 and 812 and outputs a corresponding error notification sound (display screen 812 of FIG. 107 described later).
The same applies to a, 812b, and 812c). For example, the voice (error notification sound) “please remove the ball” is output from the speakers 19a, 19b (sound output means). This error alert sound
It is given priority over the sound output for effects such as BGM that is output in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed (including the notice effect such as the cut-in display 813). Specifically, the volume of the error notification sound (or a parameter affecting the ease of hearing, such as sound directivity) is set larger than the sound output for the production, or the sound for the production during the output of the error notification sound. Stop output.

Here, the effect by the cut-in display 813 corresponds to a first effect that has priority over error notification (error notification display (that is, error display), error notification sound output, etc.).
On the other hand, the effect by the sound output for effects such as BGM corresponds to the second effect subordinate to the error notification.

Even if an error has occurred, the configuration is such that the image (the image forming the first effect) displayed in the strong notice effect (specific effect) is displayed preferentially over the error display as in the present embodiment. It is possible to entertain the player and achieve a high level of entertainment. That is, by displaying on the front side in preference to the error display, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player and improve the interest when an error occurs.
If the error display is always prioritized over the strong notice as in the prior art, the player will not be able to see at least a part of the display even if the strong notice is produced by the error display. However, in the present embodiment, this problem is solved. In particular, images such as the above-mentioned character 814 and character 815 that greatly change the degree of expectation depending on the presence or absence of appearance (the image most watched by the player, the main display of the strong notice) become invisible due to an error display (particularly a weak error). If this is the case, the interest of the game will be greatly reduced, but in this embodiment, such a problem is avoided.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the error display is concealed by a strong notice, the error notification sound has priority over the sound output for production (sound output that makes the second production). It becomes easy for a player or the like to notice that it is an error, and an operation for correcting the error state can be appropriately performed, and the reliability of error notification can be ensured.

Note that the display priority of images (the order of whether the images are displayed on the front side or the rear side when the display positions overlap) is, for example, the above-described effect display editing The setting can be made according to the order of the editing process in the process (step D23). As one aspect, the display priority is lower and the image data that is first edited and pasted (written) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) in the effect display editing process (step D23) is displayed at the back side. In this case, the editing process may be performed in order from the image data having the lowest display priority.

Next, display screens 812a, 812b, shown in FIGS. 107 (1), (2), and (3), respectively.
812c is another specific example of the screen displayed after the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) is displayed instead of the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106 (4).

In the display screen 812a shown in FIG. 107 (1), the background image of the images constituting the cut-in display 813 is displayed behind the error display image (that is, the error notification image 807) as an auxiliary display, and the rest is displayed. In this example, only the images of the character 814 and the character 815 are displayed on the near side with priority over the error notification image 807. In this way, the image that conceals the error notification image is a part of an image displayed with a specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) (preferably, a characteristic image that suggests a difference in the degree of expectation of jackpot, for example, a strong notice Main display) only. On the display screen 812a, for example, the character 814 may be displayed as an auxiliary display on the back side of the error notification image 807, and only the character 815 may be displayed as the main display on the near side of the error notification image 807. Thereby, the high interest by specific production (for example, production of strong notice) is realizable, securing the visibility of error display to some extent.

Here, the effect by the character 815 or the like displayed on the front side of the error notification image 807 in the cut-in display 813 corresponds to the first effect prioritizing the error notification. On the other hand, the background image displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 in the cut-in display 813 corresponds to a second effect subordinate to the error notification.

In the display screen 812b shown in FIG. 107 (2), instead of the cut-in display 813, a plurality of characters 814a like small rockets are displayed as an effect of a weak notice (notice having a lower big hit expectation level than a strong notice). Yes. This small rocket-like character 814a is displayed behind the error notification image 807 and does not hide the error notification image 807. As described above, an aspect of giving priority to the error display may be used for the effect of the weak notice. As a result, the visibility of the error display can always be maintained satisfactorily for the weak notice effect even if the notice occurs. Here, the effect of weak notice by the character 814a displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the second effect subordinate to the error notification.

If the display effect is inferior to the error notification (when error display is prioritized over the display effect) as in the weak notice effect shown in FIG. 107 (2), the sound output for the effect is notified by the error notification. You may make it give priority over the sound output (especially notification sound of weak error) for. For example, FIG. 107 (2) shows a state in which an error notification voice output “please remove the ball” is shown, but when the notice effect in which the character 814a appears is being performed, The sound output for the error notification “please remove the ball” is temporarily reduced or set to zero, and the sound output (BGM,
An effect sound, for example, a sound such as “rocket group start!” May be preferentially performed (for example, at a louder volume than the error notification sound).

Thereby, even if a part of the display effect of the notice is concealed by the error display, the effect of the effect and interest are maintained by preferentially outputting the sound for the notice effect. In this case, the effect by the sound output for effect corresponds to the first effect that has priority over error notification. On the other hand, the display effect by the character 814a corresponds to a second effect subordinate to the error notification.

The display screen 812c shown in FIG. 107 (3) is a case where the error notification image 807 whose display is started on the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) is a strong error (one having higher importance than the weak error). This is a specific example of a display screen after the display screen 811. As the strong error, for example, there is an illegal error detected by the panel radio wave sensor 62 or the magnetic sensor 61 described above.
On the display screen 812c, the error notification image 807 that is an error display of a strong error is prioritized over the cut-in display 813 that is an effect display of a strong notice, and the error notification image 807 is placed on the near side of the cut-in display 813. it's shown. Thus, it is good also as an aspect which restrict | limits the error alert image concealed by a specific effect only to a weak error. Thereby, it is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of an error display of an important strong error and to ensure high reliability of error notification.

When error notification (such as error display or sound output for error notification) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time, the execution time of the effect of concealing the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above, or error notification It is preferable that the execution time of the production sound output that has priority over the sound output is less than the shortest execution time for error notification. As a result, even if an effect that conceals the error display or a sound output for an effect that has priority over the error notification is performed, the error notification is hindered by these effects in at least a part of the period during which the error notification is performed. It is made surely.

In addition, when the error display is performed by blinking display (which is periodically turned on and off, or repeatedly displayed and not displayed), the execution time of the effect of hiding the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above is As shown in FIG. 113 (2) which will be described later, it is preferable that the error display time is less than the lighting display time. As a result, even if an effect of concealing the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by this effect in at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed.

When the error display is performed by blinking, the cut-in display 813 described above is used.
For example, as shown in FIG. 113 (3) described later, a time offset (shift time) is set as necessary so that the execution timing of the effect concealing the error display is not synchronized with the lighting timing of the error display. It is good also as an aspect which adjusts the execution timing of an error display, or the execution timing of an effect by inserting.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including modifications) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes main control means (game control means; game control device 100) for performing game control such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for decoration (decorative special figure, for example, the above-mentioned large symbols Display means (display device 41) for performing a variable display game for variably displaying the group 801), and presentation means (display device 41, display device) based on a command (command) of the main control means
Subordinate control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for effect control for controlling speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). The slave control means can execute an error display for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine 10 based on a command or based on an error determination by the slave control means, and an error display is provided as an effect by the effect means. A control unit (CPU 311) capable of executing a specific effect that conceals at least a part (for example, an effect of displaying a cut-in display 813) is provided. As the error display, the control unit displays, for example, an error notification image (for example, an error notification image 807) that is an image for notifying an error on the display unit, for example, and the specific effect conceals at least a part of the error notification image. Note that the error display and the specific effect may be performed by display means different from the display means for playing the variable display game.

(2) A sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) is further provided, and the control section of (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine by the sound output means, When the specific production includes a production sound output, the error notification sound is output with higher priority than the production sound output.

(3) The control unit of (1) uses the first image (for example, the character 814 and the character 815 in the cut-in display 813) and the second image (for example, the background of the cut-in display 813) as an effect image in the specific effect. The first image is set to have a higher display priority than the error notification image, and the second image is set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image. That is, the first image conceals the error notification image in a portion that overlaps with the error notification image, and the second image does not conceal the error notification image even in a portion that overlaps with the error notification image (the error notification image is displayed on the front side). )

(4) The control unit of (1) performs the first effect corresponding to the specific effect as the effect by the effect means (
For example, it is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a weak notice effect) that does not correspond to the specific effect, and an effect image (for example, a cut-in display 813) that is displayed in the first effect.
Alternatively, the display priority order is set higher than the error notification image for the character 814 in the cut-in display 813), and the display priority order for the effect image (for example, the character 814a) displayed in the second effect is higher than the error notification image. Set low. That is, the effect image displayed in the first effect conceals the error notification image in a portion overlapping the error notification image, and the effect image displayed in the second effect conceals the error notification image even in a portion overlapping the error notification image. Set to not (display so that the error notification image is on the front side).

(5) The control unit of (1) can notify a first error (for example, a strong error) and a second error (for example, a weak error) as errors, and display priority of images for notifying the first error Is set higher than the display priority of the image displayed as the specific effect, and the display priority of the image informing the second error is set lower than the display priority of the image displayed as the specific effect. That is, the image informing the first error is not concealed by the effect image in a portion overlapping the effect image displayed in the specific effect, and the image informing the second error is displayed in the specific effect. It is set so as to be concealed by the effect image at the overlapping part.

(6) The control unit in (1) can report a first error (for example, a strong error) and a second error (for example, a weak error) as an error, a sound output for reporting the first error, and a second error The sound output for informing the error is prioritized over the sound output performed as an effect including a specific effect.

(7) The control unit of (1) displays the display priority of the error notification image related to a predetermined error notification (for example, notification of a strong error) as a specific effect (for example, an effect of strong or weak notification). If at least a part of the effect image is concealed by the error notification image, the effect sound output as the specific effect related to the concealed effect image is output as an error notification as a predetermined error notification. Prioritize over sound output. The feature described in (7) is, for example, a modification in which the production sound output is given priority over the error notification sound in the specific examples (example in which error display is given priority) shown in FIGS. 107 (2) and 107 (3). Corresponds to the features of the example.

(8) The production means of (1) is further a sound output means (for example, speakers 19a, 19b).
And a moving effect means (for example, the board effect device 44), and the control unit can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine by the sound output means, and for the effect for the specific effect. When the sound output is included, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect, and the effect related to the movable operation is performed regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs the normal movable operation. The display (effect display) is displayed on the display means.

In addition, when the movable effect means cannot perform a normal movable operation, that is, the malfunction of the movable effect means includes a failure of the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable effect means, disconnection or connection failure of a required connector, wiring There are disconnection, mechanical mechanism failure, etc.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of 5th Embodiment, and a movable accessory.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 108 (1) is the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3).
Since this is the same as the above, description thereof is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

A display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811 and is a display screen that displays effect images 816 and 817 as a background of a strong warning that the movable accessory operates. . As the movable accessory, for example, the movable part of the third board effect device 706 described above (described in FIG. 82 in the third embodiment) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and It is positioned at a predetermined position covering the vicinity of the upper side from the center. The effect image 816 is a background image that extends from the back side (back side) of the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 to the surroundings, and is seen from the front surface (that is, as viewed from the player), the third board effect device 706. This is an image in which the periphery of the circular movable part is decorated and produced together with the movable part.

The effect image 817 is a pair of left and right images representing a predetermined expression of the human eye, and is displayed superimposed on the front side in the effect image 816. In the case of this example, the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 is provided with openings 706a such as the eyes of a human face in two places on the left and right sides, and an effect image 817 is provided from this opening 706a. Each of them can be seen from the front, and the circular moving part of the third board effect device 706 and the effect image 817 realize display like a human face with a predetermined expression.

Note that the effect images 816 and 817 are set lower in display priority than the error notification image 807 and are displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807. Also, effect images 816, 8
17 may be displayed as an integral image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (2), the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 that has moved to a predetermined position conceals almost the entire error notification image 807 in this case, and an error display is performed. Even entertain the player to achieve a highly interesting production. The effect image 81
The display of 6,817 may be started in the state shown in FIG. 108 (2) from the time when the movement is started from the position where the third board effect device 706 is stored, or the third board effect device 706 is displayed at a predetermined position. It may start in the same way when it has moved to the position, or start from displaying only the lower end of the effect image 816 in response to the appearance of the movable part of the third board effect device 706 and move the third board effect device 706. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the third board rendering device 706 so as to follow the movement of the part.

The display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108 (3) is the same as the display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108 (2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. FIG. 108 (3) shows that the strong notice accompanying the operation of the third board effect device 706 has started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the storage position due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, for example. Indicates. As described above, in a state where the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed as a strong notice effect, and the error is displayed on the front side with priority over the effect images 816 and 817. The entire notification image 807 is visible. For this reason, it is possible to make a player or the like recognize an abnormal state of the movable combination that the movable combination does not move even though the movable combination should move strongly. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed in this manner so that the player or the like can recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory. Is preferred.

In the case of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is also the case of FIG. 106 described above (fourth embodiment).
Similarly, the error notification image 807 is displayed, and the corresponding error notification sound output is preferentially performed over the production sound output. In addition, in FIG. 108, in addition to the production sound output, the error notification sound output is also omitted.

Here, the production by the third board production device 706 (movable accessory) is given priority over error notification.
It corresponds to the production of. On the other hand, the effect by the sound output for effects such as the effect images 816 and 817 and BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the error notification image is concealed by the effect by the movable accessory has been described. However, when the effect by the movable accessory is a weak notice effect, the effect by the movable accessory has occurred. In addition, when error notification (including display of an error notification image) is performed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the movable accessory changes to an effect that does not execute the operation of concealing the error notification image 807.

[First Modification of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 109 (1) is the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) described above.
Since this is the same as the above, description thereof is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates. FIG. 109 (1) shows a state in which the lower ends of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable objects, are positioned on the upper left and upper right front surfaces of the display area of the display device 41. It is illustrated as an example. However, at this point of time, the lower end of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R may not be positioned in front of the display area of the display device 41 and may be retracted upward from the display area.

A display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen that displays an effect image 816 as a background of a strong warning that the movable accessory operates. As the movable accessory, for example, the above-mentioned second board effect device 705L, 705R (third
82), the movable part moves toward the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the error notification image 807 in which the lower end of the movable part is displayed in the central part of the display area is displayed. It is in a state of partially concealing.

The display screen 824 shown in FIG. 109 (3) is the same as the display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109 (2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. However, the effect image 81
6 may be different between the display screen 824 and the display screen 823.
FIG. 109 (3) shows a state where the movements of the second board rendering devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessories, have reached predetermined positions. That is, the lower ends of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R reach a position slightly below the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are adjacent to the left and right. It is positioned in a joined state so as to fit. In this state, a wide area including substantially the upper half of the display area of the display device 41 is concealed by the movable parts of the joined second board effect devices 705L and 705R, and most of the error notification image 807 is the second board effect device 705L. , 705R.

In this modification, the effect image 816 is a background image that extends from the back side (back side) of the movable part of the second board rendering devices 705L and 705R to the surroundings, and is viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player). It is an image that decorates the periphery of the movable part of the two-panel effect devices 705L and 705R and produces an effect together with the movable part. Note that since the same type of effect image is used, the same reference numerals are used. However, the effect image 816 shown in FIG. 108 and the effect image 816 shown in FIG. 109 have colors, patterns, brightness, and the like. The aspect of the image may be different. Note that the effect image 816 has a display priority lower than that of the error notification image 807 and is displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (3), the second board rendering device 705L moved to the predetermined position,
In this case, the movable portion 705R conceals almost the entire error notification image 807, and even if an error is displayed, the player can be entertained and an entertaining presentation can be realized. Note that the display of the effect image 816 may be started in the state shown in FIG. 109 (2) from the time when the movement is started from the position where the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are stored, or the second board effect device. 705L,
The same may be started when 705R moves to a predetermined position, or the second board rendering device 705 may be started.
In response to the appearance of the movable part of L, 705R, the second board effect device 705L, so as to follow the movement of the movable part of the second board effect devices 705L, 705R, starting from the display of only the lower end of the effect image 816. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable portion of 705R.

In the case of this modification, the gaming machine 10 also displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding error notification sound output for production as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Prioritize over sound output. In FIG. 109, in addition to the sound output for production, the sound output for error notification is also omitted.

Here, the effects by the second board effect devices 705L and 705R (movable accessories) correspond to the first effect that has priority over error notification. On the other hand, the effect by the sound output for effects such as the effect image 816 and BGM corresponds to the second effect subordinate to the error notification.

[Modification 2 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 110 (1) is the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3).
Since this is the same as the above, description thereof is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

A display screen 823a shown in FIG. 110 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and displays an effect image 816 as a background of the strong warning for the movable accessory to operate and an auxiliary display of the strong warning (failure recognition). This is a display screen on which auxiliary images 826L and 826R are displayed. Here, the effect image 816 is the same image as the effect image 816 of the first modification shown in FIG. 109 (2). The auxiliary images 826L and 826R are displayed on the second board rendering device 705.
When L and 705R operate normally, a position that is located behind the movable part of the second board rendering device 705L and 705R and cannot be visually recognized by the movable part of the second board rendering device 705L and 705R. It is an image displayed in the size. In the case of the example in the figure, auxiliary images 826L, 826
R is an image having an outer shape that is substantially similar to the movable part of the second board rendering devices 705L and 705R and smaller in size than the movable part.

A display screen 824a shown in FIG. 110 (3) is a screen after the display screen 823a, and is an auxiliary image 8 that is a display of an effect image 816 and an auxiliary display of a strong notice (a fault recognizable display).
27 is a display screen on which 27 is displayed. Here, the effect image 816 is shown in FIG.
This is the same image as the effect image 816 of Modification 1 shown in (3). Auxiliary image 827
When the second board rendering device 705L, 705R operates normally, the second board rendering device 705L.
, 705R is an image displayed at a position and size that is located behind the movable part of 705R and is always hidden by the movable part of the second board rendering device 705L, 705R and cannot be visually recognized. In the case of the example in the figure, the auxiliary image 827 includes the characters “insufficiency item” and the second board effect devices 705L and 70.
The image is smaller than the 5R movable part.

110 (2) and 110 (3) start the strong notice with the operation of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. For example, the second board effect device 705L and 705R may fail due to a failure. The movable part of apparatus 705L, 705R shows the state which does not move from a storage position. That is, FIG. 110 (2) shows the timing of the notice effect that the second board effect devices 705L and 705R should be operating as shown in FIG. A state in which the production devices 705L and 705R are not operating is shown. Further, FIG. 110 (3) shows the timing of the notice board effect that the second board effect devices 705L and 705R should be operating as shown in FIG. This shows a state where the devices 705L and 705R are not operating.

As described above, in a state where the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect image 816 is displayed as a strong notice effect, and the error notification image 807 displayed on the front side with priority over the effect image 816 is displayed. The whole is visible, and the auxiliary images 826L and 826 are further displayed.
R and the auxiliary image 827 are visible. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player or the like to reliably recognize the abnormal state of the movable combination that the movable combination does not move even though the movable combination should move.
Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary images 826L and 826R and the auxiliary image 827 are further displayed. It is preferable that the player or the like recognize the abnormal state.

In the case of this modification, the gaming machine 10 also displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding error notification sound output for production as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Prioritize over sound output. In addition, in FIG. 110, in addition to the production sound output, the error notification sound output is also omitted.

[Modification 3 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the modification 3 of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 111 (1) is the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3).
Since this is the same as the above, description thereof is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

A display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811 and is a display screen that displays effect images 816 and 828 as a background of a strong warning that the movable accessory operates. . As the movable accessory, for example, the movable part of the third board effect device 706 described above (described in FIG. 82 in the third embodiment) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and It is positioned at a predetermined position covering the vicinity of the upper side from the center. The effect image 816 is similar to the above-described example of FIG.
6 is a background image that extends from the back side (back side) to the periphery of the circular movable part 6, and is an image that decorates the periphery of the movable part as viewed from the front and produces an effect together with the movable part.

The effect image 828 is a pair of left and right images representing a predetermined expression of the human eye, and is displayed superimposed on the front side in the effect image 816. In this example as well, FIG.
Similar to the example of 2), the circular movable portion of the third board directing device 706 is provided with openings 706a such as the eyes of a human face in two places on the left and right sides, and effects are provided through the openings 706a. Image 82
8 are visible from the front, and the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 and the effect image 828 realize display like a human face with a predetermined expression.

The effect images 816 and 828 are set lower in display priority than the error notification image 807 and are displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807. Also, effect images 816, 8
28 may be displayed as an integral image.

As shown in FIG. 111 (2), the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 that has moved to a predetermined position conceals almost the entire error notification image 807, and even if an error is displayed, the game Entertain the audience and realize a highly interesting production. The effect images 816 and 82
8 is displayed when the movement is started from the position where the third board effect device 706 is stored.
1 (2) may be started, or may be similarly started when the third board rendering device 706 moves to a predetermined position, or the appearance of the movable part of the third board rendering device 706 Correspondingly, starting from the display of only the lower end of the effect image 816, it is displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the third board effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the movable part of the third board effect device 706. May be.

A display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (3) is a screen after the display screen 811, and an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41 is a display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (2).
Is the same. In FIG. 111 (3), the strong notice accompanying the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the storage position due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, for example. Indicates. As described above, in a state where the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as a strong notice effect, and an error is displayed on the front side with priority over the effect images 816 and 828. The entire notification image 807 is visible. For this reason, it is possible to make a player or the like recognize an abnormal state of the movable combination that the movable combination does not move even though the movable combination should move strongly. The error notification image 807
Even when is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect image 81 is thus displayed.
Preferably, 6,828 is displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory.

A display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111 (4) is a screen after the display screen 811 similarly to the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (3). What is characteristic is that, on the display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111 (4), in addition to displaying the effect images 816 and 828, an auxiliary image 829 which is an auxiliary display of strong notice (failure recognizable display) is displayed. The auxiliary image 829 is the third
When the board production device 706 operates normally, a position that is located behind the movable part of the third board production device 706 and is always hidden by the movable part of the third board production device 706 and cannot be visually recognized. It is an image displayed in the size. In the case of the example in the figure, the auxiliary image 829 is an image that includes the characters “insufficient item failure” and is smaller in size than the movable part of the third board rendering device 706.

111 (4), as in FIG. 111 (3), has started a strong notice with the operation of the third board effect device 706, but for example, the third board effect device 706 due to a failure of the third board effect device 706. 7
The state where the movable part 06 does not move from the storage position is shown. That is, FIG. 111 (4) is similar to FIG.
11 (2) shows a state in which the third board effect device 706 is not operating even though the timing of the notice effect that the third board effect device 706 should be operating.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 111 (4), when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as the effect of the strong notice, and the effect image 816 is displayed.
, 828, the entire error notification image 807 displayed on the front side can be visually recognized, and the auxiliary image 829 can be visually recognized. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player or the like to reliably recognize the abnormal state of the movable combination that the movable combination does not move even though the movable combination should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary image 829 is further displayed.
It is preferable that the player or the like recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory.

In the case of this modification, the gaming machine 10 also displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding error notification sound output for production as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Prioritize over sound output. In addition, in FIG. 111, in addition to the production sound output, the error notification sound output is also omitted.

Here, the production by the third board production device 706 (movable accessory) is given priority over error notification.
It corresponds to the production of. On the other hand, the effect by the sound output for effects such as the effect images 816, 828 and BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

[Fourth Modification of the Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the modification 4 of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen and a light guide plate according to Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 112, a perspective view showing the arrangement and state of the light guide plate is shown on the left side, and the display device 4 is shown on the right side.
An example of a display screen displayed in one display area is shown. The left perspective view of FIG. 112 shows only the arrangement and state of the light guide plate. In this perspective view, the image content of the display screen of the display device 41 is not shown.

The light guide plate has a plate-like body made of acrylic or the like as a main element. Light from a light emitting element such as an LED is incident on the plate-like body from one side surface, and the light is surfaced by unevenness formed on the plate-like body. By deriving from the side (front side), the device can emit light almost uniformly on the front side or display specific characters or figures corresponding to irregularities on the front side. As the light guide plate, the entire back side can be seen through from the front surface with high transparency when the light emitting element is not emitting light, and characters and figures corresponding to the unevenness are partially displayed when the light emitting element emits light. Some of them are displayed so as to lift up.

In this modification, the light guide plates 831 and 832 which are such light guide plates are arranged so as to overlap the front side of the display area of the display device 41 as shown on the left side of FIG. In this modification, for example, two sets of light guide plates 831 and 832 having a display portion (a portion that becomes a transparent window in the off state) larger than the display area of the display device 41 are displayed on the display device 41. It is placed in a fixed state over the front of the area. Note that the light emitting elements attached to the light guide plates 831 and 832 are not shown. In addition, the light guide plates 831 and 832 are provided so as to be movable, for example, from a standby position (storage position) retracted away from the front surface of the display area of the display device 41 to a position overlapping the front surface of the display area of the display device 41. When performing with the light-guide plates 831 and 832, the aspect which moves from a standby position and uses it as a movable accessory may be sufficient.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (1), the display screen 833 shown in FIG. 112 (1) is similar to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. It is a display screen. The display screen 833 is, for example, the display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106 (2) described above.
This is a screen after the reach, in which the left and right symbols are “3” and the reach is changing. Further, for example, the above-described overflow switch signal is output during the change to the display screen 833,
In response to this, the error notification image 807 described above is displayed on the display screen 833.

In the state shown in FIG. 112 (1), as shown on the left side of FIG.
Both 31 and 832 are in an off state, and the entire display screen 833 on the back side of these light guide plates 831 and 832 is clearly visible from the front side. In FIG. 112,
The small symbol group 802, the special figure 1 hold number display 803, the special figure 2 hold number display 804, the hold display 805, and the hold digest display 806 described with reference to FIG. Is also omitted.

A display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112 (2) is a display screen for a cut-in effect during a reach effect, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (2), like the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above. It is. The display screen 834 is a screen after the display screen 833, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols are “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined expectation with a cut-in display 813a or the like (cut-in effect) for the change display during the reach effect.

However, unlike the cut-in display 813 of the display screen 812 described above, the cut-in display 813a of this modification example is composed only of an image such as a rocket background (for example, a dark universe). Does not include images.

In the state shown in FIG. 112 (2), as shown on the left side of FIG.
31 and 832, only the light guide plate 832 is turned on. When the light guide plate 832 is turned on, the character 832 a that is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832 becomes visible from the front side. The display screen 834 on the back side of the optical plates 831 and 832 is clearly visible from the front side except for the display range of the character 832a. In other words, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (2), the character 83 is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832.
2a partially hides the display area of the display device 41. In this case, the error notification image 8
A corresponding range of 07 is hidden by the character 832a. For this reason, even if an error display is performed, the player is entertained and a highly interesting production is realized.

Here, the character 832a which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832 is, for example, a rocket-like image similar to the character 814 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above, and is cut from the display screen 834 when viewed from the front. In display 813a (display of display area of display device 41)
Overlapping and realizing an integrated display effect.

This example is merely an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 may include another image, for example, a character on a rocket. Further, a part of an image such as a rocket, for example, a part of a flame emitted from a rocket engine emitted from the lower end of the rocket is displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, a part of the display screen 834). May be. The portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 can easily change the mode (for example, display color) of the image according to the degree of expectation.

A display screen 834a shown in FIG. 112 (3) is a display screen for a cut-in effect during a reach effect, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3), similar to the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above. It is. The display screen 834a is similar to the display screen 834 shown in FIG.
12 is a screen after the display screen 833 shown in FIG. 12 (1), in which the left and right symbols are “3” and the reach is changing. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined expectation with a cut-in display 813a or the like (cut-in effect) for the change display during the reach effect. The case of FIG. 112 (3) is an effect that suggests that, for example, the jackpot expectation is higher than that in the case of FIG. 112 (2) described above.

The display screen 834a of the present modified example is a position that appears to be on a rocket in addition to a cut-in display 813a that is an image like a rocket background (eg, an image like a dark universe) as a cut-in effect image. It is a screen which displays the character 835 like a tiger displayed on.

In the state of FIG. 112 (3), as shown on the left side of FIG.
31 and 832 are both in an on state, whereby a character 832a that is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832 and a character 8 that is an image displayed on the light guide plate 831 are displayed.
31a and 831b are visible from the front side, and the display screen 834a on the back side of each light guide plate 831 and 832 is clearly visible from the front side except for the display range of the characters 831a, 831b, and 832a. In other words, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3), the display area of the display device 41 is partially hidden by the characters 831a, 831b, and 832a that are images displayed on the respective light guide plates. Many areas of the image 807 are hidden by the characters 831a, 831b, and 832a. For this reason, even if an error display is performed, the player is entertained and a highly interesting production is realized.

Here, the characters 831a and 831 which are images displayed on the light guide plates 831 and 832.
b and 832a are images like a rocket like the character 814 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above, for example, and when viewed from the front, the cut-in display 813a on the display screen 834a and the character 835 (display area of the display device 41) are displayed. To achieve an integrated display effect. Particularly in this example, when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed by the player), a tiger-like character 835 becomes a rocket-like character 831a as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3).
It is configured to appear to be on board.

This example is merely an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plates 831 and 832 may include another image, for example, a character on a rocket. Further, a part of an image such as a rocket, for example, a part of a flame radiated from the lower end of the rocket may be displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, a part of the display screen 834a). . Alternatively, an image such as a rocket may be displayed as a part of, for example, the cut-in display 813a on the display screen 834a, and when viewed from the front, a state in which more rockets are flying can be visually recognized. The portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 can easily change the mode (for example, display color) of the image according to the degree of expectation. For example, a difference in expectation can be suggested by changing the presence, form (for example, display color), and type of the character 835 on the character 831a such as a rocket.

Moreover, a light guide plate is not limited to 2 sets, 1 set may be sufficient and 3 sets or more may be used. Further, the light guide plate may be in an on state, for example, the entire light emission, and in an extreme example, the entire display area of the display device 41 may be hidden. Also, due to the action of the light guide plate, part or all of the display screen is whiteout (or blacked out), or the brightness or illuminance of part or all of the display screen is reduced, thereby concealing the error notification image. There may also be embodiments. Further, the light guide plate may be configured to move from the front surface of the display device 41 and stand by at a position where it does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 when it does not produce an effect. Can be used (those with less translucency).

In the case of this modification, the gaming machine 10 also displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding error notification sound output for production as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Prioritize over sound output. In addition, in FIG. 112, in addition to the production sound output, the error notification sound output is also omitted.

Here, the effect by the light guide plates 831 and 832 (display means, movable accessory) corresponds to a first effect that has priority over error notification. On the other hand, the effect by the sound output for effects such as the effect image 813a and BGM corresponds to the second effect subordinate to the error notification.

In addition, there are a display means for performing an effect by display, a sound output means for performing an effect by sound, and a movable accessory performing an effect by the movement of a movable part. Specific examples of priorities of error notification and notice effect including those described in (Fifth Embodiment) and the above-described fourth embodiment are summarized as follows, and differ depending on the effect means.

First, if the priority on the display means is described in the order of higher priority, strong error notification> strong notice effect> weak error notice> weak notice effect. Next, the priority in the sound output means is
Similarly, strong error notification> weak error notification> strong notice effect, weak notice effect. The priority order in the sound output means may be strong error notification> weak error notification> strong notice effect> weak notice effect. Next, the priority order in the movable combination is similarly the strong notice effect> the strong error notification> the weak error notification>
It becomes a weak notice effect. Here, a strong error means an error with a relatively high importance, and a weak error means an error with a lower importance than a strong error. A strong notice means a notice with a relatively high degree of reliability (expected degree such as a big hit), and a weak notice means a notice with a lower degree of reliability than a strong notice.

[Modification 5 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the modification 5 of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. This modification is an error display and an effect of concealing the error display described in the present embodiment (fifth embodiment) and the aforementioned fourth embodiment (a display effect of a strong notice such as a cut-in effect, a movable accessory) This is characterized by the execution time and execution timing of the production by the movement of the movable part, the production by the display and movement of the light guide plate). FIG. 113 is an example of a timing chart showing a temporal relationship between an error display (blinking display) and an effect for concealing the error display.

First, although not shown, when error notification (such as error display or error notification sound output) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time (when not blinking display), the above-described third-disc effector 706 or It is preferable that the execution time of the effect of concealing the error display by the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the light guide plates 831 and 832 be less than the shortest execution time of the error notification. As a result, even if an effect of concealing the error display is performed, the error notification is reliably performed without being hindered by this effect in at least a part of the period during which the error notification is performed.

Next, when the error display is performed by blinking display (periodically turning on and off or repeating display and non-display) as shown in FIG. 113 (1), the effect of concealing the error display (the above-described cut) In display 813, third board effect device 706, second board effect device 705L,
The execution time of 705R and the light guide plates 831 and 832 is preferably shorter than the error display lighting display time (execution time Ton described later) as shown in FIG. 113 (2).

Here, FIG. 113 (1) shows an effect of concealing the error display when the error display is a blinking display that repeats an operation that is executed for the execution time Ton and is stopped (not displayed) for the non-execution time Toff. This is an example of a timing chart when the execution time TP is longer than the error display execution time Ton. In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (1), if the execution timing of the error display and the execution timing of the effect concealing the error display are synchronized, the entire error display time of the single execution time Ton is temporally. It is concealed and the longest continuous time in which the error display cannot be visually recognized by the observer (player, etc.) is a time T0 (T0 = Ton + 2 × Toff) that is considerably long.

However, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), as shown in FIG. 113 (2), if the execution time of the effect for concealing the error display is less than the lighting display time of the error display (TP <Ton), as shown in FIG. The time T1 (T1 <Ton + T) is much shorter than the time T0 when the error display of the execution time Ton is not concealed in terms of time and the observer cannot visually recognize the error display.
off). That is, even if an effect that conceals the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by this effect in at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized. Decrease dramatically.

Further, when the error display is performed by blinking display, as shown in FIG. 113 (3), the time execution of the effect concealing the error display is not synchronized with the execution timing of the error display. By inserting an offset ΔT (shift time)
It may be configured to adjust the execution timing of error display.

The operation shown in FIG. 113 (3) is, for example, in the control process in the effect control apparatus 300 that performs the error display (blinking display) shown in FIG. 113 (1), and the execution of the effect that hides the error display execution period and the error display. Whether or not the periods overlap (simultaneous periods) is determined in advance every cycle, and if it is determined that they overlap, it can be realized by performing a process of delaying the timing to start executing the error display by the offset ΔT for the overlap period. .

Unlike the mode shown in FIG. 113 (3), the execution timing of the effect may be adjusted by inserting a temporal offset ΔT into the effect that conceals the error display. In addition, in the control process for inserting the offset ΔT in this way, the production execution time TP is the same as the error display execution time Ton, or the production execution time TP is the error display execution time as shown in FIG. The configuration may be performed only when it is longer than Ton (that is, when TP ≧ Ton).

In any case, by inserting the offset ΔT as described above, for example, FIG.
As shown in 13 (3), the entire time of error display for one execution time Ton is not concealed in time, and the longest continuous time in which the observer cannot visually recognize the error display is much shorter than T0. It becomes T2. That is, even if an effect that conceals the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by this effect in at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized. Decrease dramatically.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fifth embodiment (including Modification 1 to Modification 5) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes main control means (game control means; game control device 100) for performing game control such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for decoration (decorative special figure, for example, the above-mentioned large symbols Display means (display device 41) for performing a variable display game for variably displaying the group 801), and presentation means (display device 41, display device) based on a command (command) of the main control means
Subordinate control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for effect control for controlling speakers 19a and 19b, second board effect devices 705L and 705R, third panel effect device 706, and the like. The slave control means can execute an error display for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine 10 based on a command or based on an error determination by the slave control means, and an error display is provided as an effect by the effect means. A specific effect of concealing at least a part (for example, an effect of a strong notice to hide an error display by operating the movable accessory 706 or the like, or an effect of a strong notice to conceal an error display by the light guide plates 831 and 832) can be executed. Control unit (CPU
311). As the error display, the control unit displays, for example, an error notification image (for example, an error notification image 807) that is an image for notifying an error on the display unit, for example, and the specific effect conceals at least a part of the error notification image. Note that the error display and the specific effect may be performed by display means different from the display means for playing the variable display game.

(2) A sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) is further provided, and the control section of (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine by the sound output means, When the specific production includes a production sound output, the error notification sound is output with higher priority than the production sound output.

(3) The control unit of (1) is a movable accessory (second board effect device 705L, 705) as a specific effect.
R or the third board effect device 706, or the light guide plates 831 and 832 in the case of a movable type, is operated, and at least a part of the display area of the display means (at least a part of the error notification image) by the movable accessory. A background image (for example, effect images 816 and 817) corresponding to the movable accessory can be displayed as an effect image in the specific effect, and the display priority of the background image is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the actuated movable accessory conceals the error notification image at a portion overlapping the error notification image, and the background image does not conceal the error notification image even at a portion overlapping the error notification image (displays the error notification image at the front side). Set as follows.

(4) The control unit of (1) performs the first effect corresponding to the specific effect as the effect by the effect means (
For example, it is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a weak notice effect) that does not correspond to a specific effect, and the second effect does not hide the error notification image (for example, error notification is performed). If there is a notice effect that activates the movable accessory, the effect is changed so that the movable accessory is not moved to a predetermined position). Further, the error notification sound for notifying the error (weak error and strong error) is output with priority over the sound output for the effects as the first effect and the second effect.

(5) The control unit of (1) is an auxiliary image concealed by the actuating movable accessory when performing the act of actuating the movable accessory as the specific effect, and is visually recognized when the movable accessory is not activated. Possible auxiliary images (for example, auxiliary images 826L and 826R, auxiliary image 827, auxiliary image 829, or part of effect image 816) are displayed on the display means.

(6) The auxiliary image of (5) visually recognizes that the movable accessory does not perform a predetermined operation (the movable accessory has failed or has been changed to an effect in which the movable accessory does not operate at a predetermined position). Information (characters or graphics) to be included.

(7) The production means of (1) is further a sound output means (for example, speakers 19a, 19b).
And a moving effect means (for example, the board effect device 44), and the control unit can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine by the sound output means, and for the effect for the specific effect. When the sound output is included, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect, and the effect related to the movable operation is performed regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs the normal movable operation. The display (effect display) is displayed on the display means.

In addition, when the movable effect means cannot perform a normal movable operation, that is, the malfunction of the movable effect means includes a failure of the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable effect means, disconnection or connection failure of a required connector, wiring There are disconnection, mechanical mechanism failure, etc.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes presentation means (display device 41) and movable presentation means (for example, a board presentation device 44), and control means (production control means; presentation control device 300) for controlling the presentation means. ). The control means causes the display means to display an effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs a normal movable operation.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, the calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
4 and will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the base is a payout rate in a normal gaming state. Here, the normal game state is a state that is neither a short-time state nor a big hit game state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variable display game is a normal probability state (
This is a state with a low probability state. The payout rate is the number of payout balls per 100 outballs. Therefore, when the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Nsafe, the base B is calculated by the equation B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out balls is the number of balls that have been launched into the game area and entered the out mouth or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal). Sometimes called out. The number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be called the number of payouts, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As already described in the description of FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 includes the status display device 13.
5 is provided. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a status display device 135 as a base display means and a storage area for the base, FIG. 114 (1) shows a display unit of the status display device 135, and FIG. 114 (2) is for the base. Indicates the storage area. FIG. 115 shows a display example by the status display device 135.

As shown in FIG. 114 (1), the status display device 135 is composed of four-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side. A dot point (small circular light emission) is located at the lower right of each 7-segment LED. Part). 4-digit 7-segment LE for base display
Of D, the left two digits are the identification segment that displays the base measurement time (whether or not the measurement is in progress and the order of measurement), and the right two digits are the ratio segment that displays the base value. It has become.
As shown in FIG. 115, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays “B” in the form of a small letter “b”.

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A as a control unit) is a RAM 111C.
A storage area for the base as shown in FIG. 114 (2) is set in the RWM, etc., and used for base calculation and base display. That is, the game control apparatus 100 stores “the number of out balls” that stores the cumulative value of the number of out balls and the cumulative value of the number of paid-out balls as the base calculation storage area.
"Number of payout balls" is set. In addition, as a storage area for the base for storing the calculated value of the base, “
“Base (BL)”, “Base (B1)”, “Base (B2)”, and “Base (B3)” are set.

Here, “base (BL)” is an area for storing the base being measured.
) "Is an area for storing the base measured one time before," Base (B2) "is an area for storing the base measured two times before, and" Base (B3) "is measured three times before This is an area for storing the base. In other words, the oldest base measurement value (calculated value) is stored in the storage area in which “base (B3)” is set.

Note that the storage values in the base calculation storage area and the base storage area described above are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (except when the RWM is abnormal), the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. It is desirable that the memory is held without being cleared to zero.

The game control device 100 uses the status display device 135 except for the case where the setting content of the probability setting (any one of the five levels) is displayed by the status display device 135 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above. Display the base. In the first embodiment described above, the mode in which the setting contents of the probability setting are displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted, and the state display device 135 may function as the probability setting value display device. In this case, the state display device 13
5 displays the setting contents in each mode, and otherwise displays the base by the status display device 135.

The game control apparatus 100 performs the calculation and display of the base as an example as follows. That is, the game control device 100 first confirms all segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 at the time of power-on, for a predetermined time (for example, 5
Blink for a second).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 displays the BL display state as shown in FIG.
B1 display state as shown in (2), B2 display state as shown in FIG. 115 (3), FIG.
The operation of maintaining the B3 display state as shown in (4) for each predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is repeatedly executed. That is, in the steady state after power-on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, The BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then B1
The display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and the four states are switched in order and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control apparatus 100 displays “bL” (BL) indicating that the measurement time of the base is being measured (current) in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area “base” in the ratio segment. (BL) "value (or"-") is displayed. In the B1 display state, the game control apparatus 100 displays “b1” (B1) indicating that the base measurement time is one time before in the identification segment, and the base storage area “base (B1) in the ratio segment. ”Value (or“--”). Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 has a measurement time of 2 based on the identification segment.
“B2” (B2) indicating the previous time is displayed, and the value (or “−−”) of the base storage area “base (B2)” is displayed in the ratio segment. In addition, the game control device 1 in the B3 display state
00 displays “b3” (B3) indicating that the base measurement time is three times before in the identification segment, and the value of the base storage area “base (B3)” in the ratio segment (or “-”). ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, for the calculation of the base, the game control device 100, after starting, for example, every time an out ball is detected in the normal gaming state (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output), The memory value of the “out ball number” is increased by a value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and each time there is a winning in the winning ball of the gaming ball in the normal gaming state (or a winning ball based on the winning occurs) Corresponding to the number of payout balls (or the number of prize balls actually paid out detected based on a signal from the payout control device 200) for which the stored value of “number of payout balls” in the base calculation storage area is generated Increase by the value you want. Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-described formula every time the stored value of “number of out balls” or “number of paid-out balls” in the base calculation storage area changes, for example, Overwrite the “base (BL)” in the base storage area as the latest value.

The game control device 100 determines that one measurement is completed when the stored value of “number of out balls” in the base calculation storage area reaches a specified measurement number (for example, 60000), the following measurement is performed. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the process at the end of the measurement, the value of the base storage area “base (B2)” at that time is used as the base storage area “base (B3)”.
And the value of the base storage area “base (B1)” at that time is overwritten with the base storage area “
Overwrite the base (B2) ”, overwrite the value of the base storage area“ base (BL) ”at that point in the base storage area“ base (B1) ”, The stored values of “Number” and “Number of balls to be paid out” are cleared and reset to zero. As a result, the base value up to three times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and held.

When the game control device 100 is turned on for the first time, the base calculation storage area “number of out balls”
In the period A in which the storage value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” is less than a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300) in each display state, The characters indicating the base measurement time, such as “bL”, “b1”, etc., are blinking displayed. In the ratio segment, as shown in FIG. 115 (4), “-” (a state in which only the center horizontally long segment is lit) is displayed. Display and notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 sets the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialization (zero clear) starts the first measurement.

Then, the game control device 100 determines the identification segment in the BL display state during the period B from the start of the first measurement until the stored value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” reaches the measured number (for example, 60000). “BL” blinks or lights up, and the ratio segment displays the value of the base storage area “base (BL)”. In period B, other display states (
(B1-B3 display state), in the identification segment, characters indicating the measurement time of the base such as “b1”... Are flashed, and in the ratio segment, “-” is displayed to notify that the measurement is not performed.

The display of “bL” in the identification segment in the BL display state is the base calculation storage area “
When the stored value of the “out ball count” is less than the measured number, the display is blinking, and when the stored value of the base calculation storage area “out ball count” reaches the measured number, the display is turned on. The blinking cycle of the blinking display in the identification segment and the ratio segment is, for example, a 0.6 second cycle, of which, for example, the lighting is 0.3 seconds and the lighting is 0.3 seconds. Further, when the stored value of “out ball number” reaches the measurement number (for example, 60000) and the period B ends, the above-described processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100, like the period B in which the first measurement is performed, refers to the period C in which the second measurement is performed, the period D in which the third measurement is performed, the period E in which the fourth measurement is performed,. The measurement is performed continuously. After the third measurement is completed, since the calculated values of the last three bases are stored, in all of the B1 to B3 display states, the base measurement time such as “b1”. In the ratio segment, the value of the corresponding storage area for base (any one of “base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)”) is displayed.

115 (1) to (4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the period D after the end of the second measurement. In this case, since there is no measurement result three times before, in FIG. 115 (4) which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “−−” (display indicating the unmeasured state).

In addition, in FIG. 115 (1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is “5 8.
", Indicating that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58. In addition, in FIG. 115 (2) which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “6 7.
", Indicating that the base value for the prescribed number of measurements measured one time before is 67. In addition, in FIG. 115 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “4 9”, and the base value with respect to the specified measurement number measured two times before is 49. It is shown that. When the base value is 100 or more, the ratio segment display is “9 9.” (the number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that it is 100 or more. Notify that.

The base value is generally in the range of about 25 to 35, for example, and is normal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range. This abnormality is called base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 115 described above shows an example in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and in a normal case, the identification segment is a numerical value within the normal range of about 25 to 35. Is displayed.

The game control device 100, for example, has measured the base three measured values (B described above) stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”).
1 to B3 display state ratio segment display values) are all out of the normal range and abnormal.
Assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, a signal indicating that a base abnormality has occurred is transmitted to an external game hall internal management device (hall computer), for example.

The signal (information) indicating the base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the base abnormality is notified to the display area of the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 300 that has received this signal. An image (for example, an image corresponding to the error notification image 807) may be displayed. Further, since this base abnormality may occur when fraud is performed, it is desirable to set the above-mentioned strong error.

In the example shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the base measurement value is stored and displayed up to the past three times, but the number of base storage areas is increased and stored and displayed up to the past four or more times. The structure to do may be sufficient. In addition, the base calculation storage area is set only for measurement,
A storage area may be provided for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculating past measurement values.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modification) will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 122. The effect control device 300 in the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment determines a detailed effect mode within the range of the variation pattern designated by the game control device 100 (for example, within the variation time designated by the game control device 100). Yes. At this time, the production control device 300 receives the variation pattern command from the game control device 100, and determines a detailed production mode by lottery. Therefore, even if the game control device 100 transmits the same variation pattern command, the effect control device 300 does not necessarily execute the same effect mode.

Such a detailed rendering mode determination by lottery makes it difficult to perform the desired rendering operation from the outside, and requires a large number of man-hours in the development process. for that reason,
The production control device 300 is configured to be able to receive the detailed variation pattern command in addition to the variation pattern command, so that the detailed production mode can be determined by the detailed variation pattern command without depending on the lottery. . In addition, since the transmission of the detailed variation pattern command is a processing burden on the game control device 100, the production control device 300 can determine a detailed production mode by lottery when the detailed variation pattern command is not received.

First, the command system of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. First, a command system between game control device 100 and effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. FIG. 116 is a first diagram illustrating an example of a command system according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 can determine a variation pattern that gives an overview of the effect by random number lottery, and can notify the effect control device 300 of the variation pattern number by a variation pattern command (command).

The effect control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern number based on the random number lottery within the range of the outline of the effect instructed from the game control device 100. At this time, the production control device 300 determines the detailed variation pattern command from the result of the random number lottery, and the detailed variation pattern command (
The detailed variation pattern number corresponding to (command) is acquired.

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect content. The production device 850 is a generic name for various devices related to the game production. Specifically, the rendering device 850 is a display device 41.
And a board decoration device 46, a frame decoration device 18, a board production device 44, speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

Thereby, the production control device 300 can control the production device 850 in the production mode within the range instructed by the game control device 100. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load on the game control device 100 while enabling the rendering device 850 to be controlled in various rendering modes.

Next, a command system between the game control device 100 and the test device 851 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a command system according to the sixth embodiment.
The test apparatus 851 can transmit an arbitrary variation pattern command and an arbitrary detailed variation pattern command to notify the effect control device 300.

The test apparatus 851 can test the operation of the effect control apparatus 300, and is, for example, a computer having a debugger function, an ICE (In-Circuit Emulator) function, or the like. The test device 851 can be connected to the effect control device 300 in place of the game control device 100 or in addition to the game control device 100 in the development environment. In addition, the test apparatus 851
It may be used not only in the development environment but also in the installation environment of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall. Further, the test apparatus 851 is not limited to a test application, but may be a development application, a verification application, and other applications.

The effect control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern number corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command) and the detailed variation pattern command acquired from the test device 851.

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect content.
Thereby, the production control device 300 can control the production device 850 in the production mode as instructed by the test apparatus 851. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can cause the rendering device 850 to perform the desired rendering operation from the outside.

In this way, the production control device 300 receives the detailed fluctuation pattern command until the details that the production contents are not clarified by only the fluctuation pattern command are received (external (
It can be as instructed from the test apparatus 851). Further, the effect control device 300 can determine by itself (random number lottery) even if it does not receive the detailed variation pattern command until the details that the effect contents are not clarified only by the variation pattern command.

In addition, the production control device 300 can grasp a variation pattern command that can be acquired only from the outside as an external command in one aspect, and can grasp a detailed variation pattern command that can be generated internally as an internal command in one aspect. In addition, the production control device 300 can grasp the fluctuation pattern command that defines the outline of the production as an outline command in one aspect, and can grasp the detailed variation pattern command that defines the details of the production as a detailed instruction in one aspect. . In addition, the production control device 300 can grasp a variation pattern command used in the operating environment of the game hall as an actual operation command in one aspect, and is used in a non-operating environment of the game hall (for example, in a test environment). The detailed variation pattern command to be obtained can be regarded as a non-operation instruction (test instruction) in one aspect.

Next, the command at the time of change transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable command according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 a change time command consisting of a group of commands at the start of change of the special figure game. For example, if the special figure game is the special figure 1 game, the game control apparatus 100 sets a command at the time of change in the special figure 1 game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control apparatus 300. If the special figure game is the special figure 2 game, the game control device 100 sets a command at the time of change in the special figure 2 game process (see FIG. 23) and transmits it to the effect control device 300.

The command at the time of change (variable command) indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the start of the change of the special figure game. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command (command name “decorative symbol designation”) in the transmission order “1”. The command name “decoration design” is MODE “8
5H ”and any one of ACTION“ 11H ”to ACTION“ 7FH ”depending on the decorative design.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “2” (command name “variation pattern designation”). The command name “change pattern designation” is changed from MODE “C0H” to MOD.
E from "D2H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to each variation pattern to AC
Any of TION “7FH” is included. Furthermore, the command name “change pattern designation” is A
Any one of OPTION “FFF000H” to OPTION “FFF7FFH” that can specify a detailed performance can be included following any one of CTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH”.

Note that, from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load, the game control apparatus 100 sets only the MODE and ACTION as the transmission target in the command name “change pattern designation” and does not set the OPTION as the transmission target. The OPTION in the command name “change pattern designation” is, for example, the test apparatus 85.
1 is a transmission target.

MODE is a 1-byte command with the most significant bit set to “1”, and ACTI
ON is a 1-byte command in which the most significant bit is “0”. Thereby, the production control device 300 can determine whether the command received by the most significant bit is MODE or ACTION. OPTION is a 3-byte command, and the most significant bit of the first byte and the most significant bit of the second byte are set to “1”. This
The production control device 300 negates the combination of MODE and ACTION from “1” of the most significant bit of the first byte and “1” of the most significant bit of the second byte, and the received command is OPTION. It can be determined that there is.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a command in the transmission order “3” (command name “number of special figure 1 hold”).
). The command name “special figure 1 hold number” includes MODE “A1H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a command in the order of transmission “4” (command name “number of special figure 2 hold”).
). The command name “special figure 2 hold number” includes MODE “A2H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, the distribution table to be referred to when the effect control apparatus 300 receives the command (command name “change pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2” will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (part 1). FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (part 2).

The effect control device 300 receives the received command from MODE “C0H” to MODE “D2H”.
”, It can be determined that the command corresponds to the command name“ variation pattern designation ”. For example, when receiving the MODE “C0H”, the effect control device 300 can determine that the distribution table 852 is a reference candidate. The distribution table 852 is a generic name for a group of distribution tables 852a, 852b, 852c,.

The effect control device 300 receives the received command from ACTION “01H” to ACTION.
If it is “7FH”, a specific distribution table to be referred to from the distribution table 852 can be uniquely specified. For example, the production control device 300 determines that the received command is AC
When TION is “01H”, a distribution table (variation pattern command: 01H) 852
a is specified as a specific distribution table to be referred to.

The distribution table 852a defines the correspondence between the lottery random number value and the detailed variation pattern command. The distribution table 852a indicates that the range that the lottery random number value can take is “0” to “999”. The lottery random number value may be a pseudo random number extracted from a high-speed counter or the like as long as it has a certain degree of randomness. The distribution table 852a is an ACTION
This indicates that there are six detailed variation pattern commands from “FFFA01H” to “FFFA06H” that can be selected when “01H” (variation pattern command: 01H) is received.

For example, the detailed variation pattern command “FFFA01H” is a command selected with a probability of 800/1000, and the detailed variation pattern command “FFFA02H” is 50/1000.
This command is selected with a probability of 1000, and the detailed variation pattern command “FFFA03
“H” is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000, a detailed variation pattern command “FFFA04H” is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000, and a detailed variation pattern command “FFFA05H” is 25 / The command is selected with a probability of 1000, and the detailed variation pattern command “FFFA06H” is a command selected with a probability of 25/1000.

The effect control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern number by referring to the relationship table using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. Here, the relationship table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example of a relationship table according to the sixth embodiment.

The relationship table 853 is a table that defines the correspondence between the detailed variation pattern command and the detailed variation pattern number. The detailed variation pattern command corresponds to a detailed variation mode (effect mode). For example, the detailed variation pattern command “FFFA01H” corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number “001001”.
In accordance with “001001”, the rendering device 850 is controlled with normal variation as a detailed variation mode.
The detailed fluctuation pattern command “FFFA02H” has a detailed fluctuation pattern number “001002”.
In response to the detailed variation pattern number “001002”, the production control device 300 controls the production device 850 with a left slip variation as a detailed variation mode. The detailed variation pattern command “FFFA03H” corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number “001003”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 with right-slip variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number “001003”. . The detailed variation pattern command “FFFA04H” corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number “001004”, and the effect control device 300 performs the medium variation as the detailed variation pattern number “001004” in the effect device 85.
Control 0. The detailed variation pattern command “FFFA05H” corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number “001005”, and the effect control device 300 uses the detailed variation pattern number “00100”.
In accordance with “5”, the rendering device 850 is controlled with a special variation as a detailed variation mode. The detailed variation pattern command “FFFA06H” corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number “001006”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 with a shortened reach variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number “001006”. .

Note that the relationship table 853 is not limited to the distribution table 852a, and is not limited to the distribution table 852b.
, 852c, etc., and the correspondence between detailed variation pattern commands defined in other distribution tables and all detailed variation pattern numbers set in the rendering device 850 may be defined.

The distribution table 852 and the relation table 853 are the PROMs of the production control device 300.
321 is stored.
Next, the effect distribution process executed when the effect control device 300 receives the command (command name “change pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2” among the commands at the time of change (variable commands) will be described using FIG. To do. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of effect distribution processing according to the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is step D of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51).
56 is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300). The control unit executes the effect distribution process when the received MODE is within the range of “C0H” to “D2H”.

[Step D311] The control unit acquires a command MODE and a command ACTION.
[Step D312] The control unit determines whether or not a command OPTION has been received. Normally, the effect control device 300 does not include the command OPTION in the received command when the command is received from the game control device 100, but the command is not included in the received command when the command is received from the test device 851. The command OPTION may be included. When the command OPTION has not been received, the control unit proceeds to step D313 to execute the command OPTI.
If ON is received, the process proceeds to step D315.

[Step D313] The control unit selects the sorting table 852 based on the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D314] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random lottery using the selected distribution table 852. Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 acquires a detailed fluctuation | variation pattern command at random, when the command OPTION is not received from the game control apparatus 100. FIG.

[Step D315] The control unit obtains a command OPTION. Thereby, the production control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern command designated by the test device 851 when the command OPTION is received from the test device 851.

[Step D316] The control unit refers to the relationship table 853 and acquires the detailed variation pattern number using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. Thereby, the production control apparatus 300 can acquire the detailed variation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION is received.

[Step D317] The control unit executes an effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
Such a gaming machine 10 can specify the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 from the outside, and can reduce the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 does not increase the control burden of the game control device 100 even if the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 can be designated from the outside.

For example, when it is desired to cause the effect control device 300 to execute effect control corresponding to the detailed variation pattern number “001006”, the game control device 100 determines that the command MODE and the command ACT
By designating ION, it is possible to cause the production control device 300 to randomly select one of the detailed variation modes defined in the distribution table 852a. However, it is not guaranteed how many times trial control apparatus 300 can select detailed variation pattern number “001006”. The number of trials increases as the contents of the production become more complicated and the number of options specified in the distribution table 852a increases. On the other hand, the production control device 300 includes a test device 851.
When receiving a command from the command MODE, command ACTION and command OP
It is possible to specify and select one of the detailed variation modes specified in the desired distribution table 852a by designating TION. Such an effect control device 300 improves workability in program development and debugging work for effect control.

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The production control device 300 according to the sixth embodiment can specify the detailed variation mode from the variation pattern designation command including one 3-byte OPTION, but the production control according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. The apparatus 300 is different in that a detailed variation mode can be specified from a variation pattern designation command including two or more 3-byte OPTIONs. First, a detailed process of determining a variation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a first modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of the effect distribution of.

The production control device 300 is not limited to receiving the variation pattern command once and performing the distribution by the distribution table 852 only once, but also performing the distribution by the distribution table 852 twice when performing a more complicated production. You may do this. For example, the production control device 300 has 2
Prepare a sorting table set when sorting more than once. The sorting table set
Includes a sorting table for each sorting point that performs sorting. Production control device 300 is MOD
When a variation pattern command including E “C1H” and ACTION “01H” is received, five distribution tables from distribution tables FT1 to FT5 (one form of distribution table 852)
The detailed production of the first half variation is determined with reference to the distribution table set including

The production control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points. For example, the production control device 300 is an OPTION “FFFA11H”.
When the fluctuation pattern command including OPTION “FFFA22H” and OPTION “FFFA41H” is received, the detailed fluctuation pattern 11 (detail fluctuation) is selected according to the OPTION “FFFA11H” by referring to the sorting table FT1 at the first sorting point. Select the pattern number in short. Next, the production control device 300 selects the detailed variation pattern 22 (the detailed variation pattern number is simply expressed) according to OPTION “FFFA22H” with reference to the distribution table FT2 at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 11. . further,
The production control device 300 uses the distribution table F at the distribution points corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 22.
With reference to T4, according to OPTION “FFFA41H”, the detailed variation pattern 41 (the detailed variation pattern number is simply expressed) is selected. Then, the production control device 300 proceeds to selection of the second half production (second half A) corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 41. The production control device 300
In the same manner as the first half variation, it is possible to select a detailed production of the second half variation (second half A).
Even in this case, the effect control apparatus 300 can receive a variation pattern command including an OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points in the second half variation.

In this way, even if the production control device 300 performs a more complicated production,
By receiving a variation pattern command including OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points, it is possible to specify a detailed effect corresponding to a complex effect.

When the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONs, a termination command that can identify the last OPTION may be set. For example, OPT
The effect control device 300 uses the ION “FFFFFFH” as a dummy command, and the OPTIO
By receiving N “FFFFFFH”, it may be determined that there is no more OPTION reception.

Also, if the variation pattern command can contain more than one OPTION, OPT
The IONs may be connected with a predetermined command. For example, with “3AH” as a special command, the production control device 300 receives the OPTION and then receives the special command “3
It may be determined that an additional OPTION is received by receiving “AH”, and that an additional OPTION is not received by not receiving the special command “3AH”. The special command “3AH” is a character “;” in the ASCII code.
”Means that the test apparatus 851 has two or more OPTIOs connected by the character“; ”.
A variation pattern command can be easily generated from a character string including N.

Also, if the variation pattern command can contain more than one OPTION, OPT
Although the IONs are connected by a predetermined command, the connection of the OPTION and the termination may be determined by an arbitrary data pattern such as a predetermined bit string or a predetermined bit length.

Next, the effect distribution process of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.
FIG. 124 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect distribution process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D56 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the effect distribution process when the received MODE is within the range of “C0H” to “D2H”.

[Step D321] The control unit acquires a command MODE and a command ACTION.
[Step D322] The control unit determines whether a command OPTION is received. The control unit proceeds to step D323 when the command OPTION is not received, and proceeds to step D326 when the command OPTION is received.

[Step D323] The control unit selects a distribution table set based on the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D324] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random lottery using the first distribution table from the selected distribution table set.

[Step D325] The control unit determines whether or not the distribution is completed based on whether or not there is a distribution point corresponding to the selected detailed variation pattern command. The control unit proceeds to step D323 when the distribution is not completed (there is a distribution point), and proceeds to step D328 when the distribution is completed (there is no distribution point).

[Step D326] The control unit acquires one command OPTION.
[Step D327] The control unit determines whether or not all commands OPTION have been acquired. The control unit proceeds to step D326 when all the commands OPTION have not been acquired, and proceeds to step D328 when all the commands OPTION have been acquired.

[Step D328] The control unit refers to the relationship table 853 and acquires the detailed variation pattern number using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. Thereby, the effect control apparatus 300 can acquire the detailed variation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION is received and regardless of the number of distribution points.

[Step D329] The control unit executes an effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
Such a gaming machine 10 can specify the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 from the outside, and can reduce the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 does not increase the control burden of the game control device 100 even if the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 can be designated from the outside.

Note that some OPTIONs may specify detailed variation pattern command selection by random lottery without corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command. In this case, the effect control apparatus 300 may determine whether to acquire a detailed variation pattern command by the command OPTION or to acquire a detailed variation pattern command by random number lottery for each distribution point. Thereby, the production control device 300 selects the detailed variation pattern command designated by OPTION for the distribution tables FT1 to FT4 among the distribution tables FT1 to FT5, and the detailed variation pattern determined by random lottery for the distribution table FT5. A command can be selected. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to improvement of development efficiency of the production control device 300.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including modifications) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The effect control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321),
And a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit includes first table data that defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPTION)) (for example, a distribution table), and a second table that defines the correspondence between the internal command and the effect pattern. Table data (for example, relational table) is stored. When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. The effect pattern is determined, and when the external command includes the internal command, the effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control means (game control apparatus 100) for performing game control, and a slave control means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of performing effect control based on an external command from the main control means.
With. The slave control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit stores internal commands (detailed variation pattern commands (OPT
ION)) distribution of first table data (for example, distribution table) and second table data (for example, relationship table) for defining the correspondence between internal commands and production patterns. . When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. The effect pattern is determined, and when the external command includes the internal command, the effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control means (game control apparatus 100) for performing game control, and a slave control means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of performing effect control based on an external command from the main control means.
With. The slave control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit stores internal commands (detailed variation pattern commands (OPT
ION)) distribution of first table data (for example, distribution table) and second table data (for example, relationship table) for defining the correspondence between internal commands and production patterns. . When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. The effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined, and the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command (for example, the special command “3AH”)
If the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the first internal command and the second table data included in the external command are used to determine the effect pattern. An effect pattern is determined using the second internal command and the second table data following the command and the connection command.

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The effect control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321),
And a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit includes first table data that defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPTION)) (for example, a distribution table), and a second table that defines the correspondence between the internal command and the effect pattern. Table data (for example, relational table) is stored. When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include an internal command, the control unit performs a lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and assigns the sorted internal command and the second table data. The effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the first internal command included in the external command when the external command includes the first internal command and does not include the connection command (for example, the special command “3AH”). When the production pattern is determined using the command and the second table data, and the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the second internal command and the second command following the connection command The production pattern is determined using the table data of No. 2.

(5) The control unit in (4) determines whether or not there is a connection command after receiving (acquiring) the first internal command, and receives (acquires) the second internal command when it is determined that there is a connection command. When it is determined that there is no connection command, the second internal command is not received (acquired).

(6) The control unit (4) receives (acquires) the connection command as an independent command different from the internal command.
(7) The connection command in (4) is a data pattern corresponding to a predetermined character string of one or more characters.

(8) The connection command in (4) is a predetermined data pattern included in the first internal command.
[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment enables a required operation by a game hall staff when the front frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 in an installation environment in a game hall. First, a required operation environment by a game hall attendant in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a perspective view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. Note that the gaming machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments also has the same configuration.

FIG. 125 shows the gaming machine 10 opening the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. The gaming machine 10 is configured to perform maintenance work by a staff member by fixing the outer frame 11 to a game hall facility generally called an island and opening the front frame 12. Therefore, gaming machine 1
0 is superior in workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent gaming machines, the front frame 12 has a large amount of protrusion of the front side structural members (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21).
The amount of opening of the front frame 12 may be limited due to interference with a calling lamp or a card unit.

The required operations by the game hall staff include, for example, a setting value confirmation operation, a setting value change operation, an operation operation including a RAM clear operation, a maintenance operation including a wiring connection confirmation, and the like.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a payout control device 200, and a power supply device 400 on the back side of the front frame 12. In addition, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back side of the game board 30.

The game control device 100 includes a state display device 135, a probability setting value display device 136, a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a RAM initialization switch 112.
Prepare to face the back side.

The gaming machine 10 facilitates the operation operation by the game hall staff by opening the front frame 12 in the setting environment of the game hall. In other words, the gaming machine 10 makes the operation operation difficult in a state where the front frame 12 is not opened in the game hall installation environment, for example, when the player is playing a game.

The gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the setting key switch 127, thereby enabling the probability setting value display device 136 to check the setting value. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a status display device 135.
Thus, the state of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed. The gaming machine 10 also has a set value change switch 1
26 and the setting key switch 127 are accepted, the probability setting value display device 1
While the set value is displayed at 36, the set value can be changed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can clear the RAM 111C by accepting an operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

Such operation operation of the gaming machine 10 by the game hall staff is performed by opening the front frame 12 in the setting environment of the game hall. Therefore, the game hall staff performs the operation operation by looking into the back side of the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is open. Therefore, the game hall attendant grasps the operation state mainly from the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 provided on the back side of the front frame 12.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 supports the grasp of the operation state of the game hall staff by the effect device provided on the front side of the front frame 12. Next, the rendering device provided on the front side of the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a perspective view (No. 2) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 includes speakers 19 a (L), 19 a (R), and 19 b on the front side of the front frame 12. The speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) are provided on the upper portion of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 1), and are provided with a speaker 19a (L) on the left side when viewed from the front side of the front frame 12, and the speaker 19a ( R). The speaker 19b is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and above the operation unit 24 (see FIG. 1). The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b can independently output sound. The speaker 19a (L) is a front frame 1
2 cannot be directly observed from the back side, but is located in the upper right portion when viewed from the back side of the front frame 12. The speaker 19a (R) cannot be directly observed from the back side of the front frame 12, but the front frame 12
It is located in the upper left as seen from the back side. The speaker 19b cannot be directly observed from the back side of the front frame 12, but is located at the lower left as viewed from the back side of the front frame 12.

The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b are provided on the front side of the front frame 12 and play a game effect. During operation, the speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b support the grasp of the operation state of the game hall staff by sound output.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 at the center of the front side of the front frame 12 and at the center of the game board 30. The display device 41 cannot be observed directly from the back side of the front frame 12, but is also located in the center when viewed from the back side of the front frame 12. The display device 41 is provided on the front side of the front frame 12 and plays a game effect, but at the time of operation, the operation state by the game hall staff can be guided to a third party by video output.

These presentation devices (speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), 19b, display device 41).
The notification and guidance of the operation state by () is not necessarily the state display device 135 or the probability setting value display device 1.
The information amount may not be as high as 36.

Next, the control state after power-on in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control state after power-on in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S3 according to the input state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The gaming control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on and the setting key switch 127 is turned on when the power is turned on. In addition, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off and the setting key switch 127 is turned on when the power is turned on. In the game control device 100, the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the setting key switch 127 is turned on.
When is OFF, the control state S2 (RAM clear) is entered. In addition, the game control device 100
When the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OF.
When F, the control state S3 (power failure recovery) is entered.

In addition, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is OFF in the control state S0.
When it becomes, it will transfer to control state S5 (game state). In addition, when the setting key switch 127 is turned OFF in the control state S1, the game control device 100 transitions to the control state S3. Moreover, the game control apparatus 100 transfers to control state S5 after RAM clear in control state S2. In addition, when the game control apparatus 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3,
If the data abnormality is not detected in the control state S3 (that is, the data is normal), the control state S5 is entered.

The game control device 100 clears the RAM and accepts a setting value change operation in the control state S0 (setting change state). The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command and a probability setting changing command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S0. Thereby, the production control device 300 is connected to the game control device 100.
Is in the control state S0, and the RAM clear and the setting change state are notified using the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting value being changed in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the setting value being changed in the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting device is in the setting change state by the effect device.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S5. Thereby, the production control device 3
00 detects the confirmation of the changed set value and notifies the confirmation of the set value using the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the set value determined in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall attendant can confirm the set value confirmed in the probability set value display device 136 and can confirm that the set value has been confirmed by the effect device.

The game control device 100 is the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state).
A command for confirming the probability setting is sent to. Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm that the setting device is in the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (power failure recovery). Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 detects the completion | finish of a setting confirmation state, and alert | reports the completion | finish of a setting confirmation state using a production | presentation apparatus. In addition, the game control device 100 ends the display of the set value on the probability set value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall attendant can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has been terminated by the effect device. Note that the game control device 100 may not transmit a probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 may receive a command (in this case, a command received with a transition from the control state S3 to the control state S5). The end of the setting confirmation state may be detected by receiving a power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100 performs the effect control device 300 in the control state S2 (RAM clear).
A RAM initialization command is transmitted to Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and notifies that the RAM has been cleared using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can set the probability setting value display device 136.
The setting value set in can be confirmed, and it can be confirmed by the effect device that the setting is confirmed.

In the control state S3 (power failure recovery), the game control device 100 transmits a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 when abnormal data is detected, and ends abnormally. Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has ended abnormally, and guides a setting change instruction using the production device because the normal set value has been lost. In addition, the game control device 100 puts the probability setting value display device 136 into a non-display state.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when data normality is detected in the control state S3. Thereby, the production control device 300
The game control device 100 detects that it is in the control state S5 and waits for reception of a command for effect control. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the state on the state display device 135 while hiding the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the transition to the gaming state, and can confirm the transition to the gaming state by resuming the game effect in the effect device.

The state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be a common display device, function as the probability setting value display device 136 in the control states S0 and S1, and in the control state S5, the state display device 135. It may function as.

Note that the gaming machine 10 uses a probability setting changing command instead of notifying the effect control device 300 that the RAM has been initialized by transmitting a RAM initialization command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Alternatively, the presentation control device 300 may be notified that the RAM has been initialized by transmitting a probability setting confirmation command. In this case, the gaming machine 10
Even if the transmission of the RAM initialization command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is omitted, the notification regarding the RAM clear can be performed.

Next, control state guidance or notification in the rendering device will be described. First, the transition timing from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (gaming state) is shown in FIG.
8 will be used for explanation. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) according to the seventh embodiment.

In the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, the setting key switch 1
When 27 is ON, the control state S0 is entered, and RAM clear is executed at timing t0.
The gaming machine 10 is in the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF at the timing t1.

The gaming machine 10 is initialized to “0” after the RAM is cleared in the control state S0,
Each time a pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 is detected, it is incremented by “1”, and when it exceeds the maximum set value, it returns to “0”. For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 at the timing t2 and updates the setting value to “1”, and detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 at the timing t3 to set the setting value. Update to “2”.

The gaming machine 10 detects OFF of the setting key switch 127 at timing t4 to confirm the update of the setting value, and shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S5. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs notification regarding the setting change and notification regarding the RAM clear using the effect device.

Next, a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear will be described. First, a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the display device 41 which is one of the effect devices will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the display device according to the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S0, and displays the display screen 860 (
FIG. 129 (1)) is displayed, and notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear are performed. At this time, since the production control device 300 has not yet received a command related to game control, the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 are displayed against the background of the initial setting display (for example, front single color). indicate. For example, RAM initialization notification display 86
1 includes a display code “01” and a message “RAM initialized” in the display content. The probability setting changing display 862 includes a display code “02” and a message “setting value changing operation is in progress” in the display contents. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the notification contents by the message, and can grasp the detailed control state corresponding to the display code with reference to the instruction manual or the like. The gaming machine 10 includes the display code and the message in the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862, but may include either one. The production control device 300 is in the RAM during the control state S0.
By displaying the initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862, the control state of the gaming machine 10 can be easily grasped by the display device 41. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 using effects such as blinking display and scroll display.

The effect control device 300 confirms the probability setting that the game control device 100 transmits at the transition timing from the control state S0 to the control state S5 (may be timing immediately before transition or timing immediately after transition). The command is received, and the display screen 86 is displayed on the display device 41.
3 (FIG. 129 (2)) is displayed to notify about the setting change. At this time, when the command related to game control has not been received yet, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 with the display of the initial setting as a background. For example, probability setting confirmation display 864
Includes the display code “03” and the message “setting value change accepted” in the display content. The effect control device 300 further displays a RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure notification regarding the RAM clear. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the command related to game control is received, so that the display device 41 can easily grasp the control state of the gaming machine 10. enable.
The production control device 300 uses the effects such as blinking display and scrolling display.
An initialization notification display 861 and a probability setting confirmation display 864 may be displayed.

The effect control device 300 receives a command related to game control (for example, a customer waiting command) transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S5, and displays the display screen 8 on the display device 41.
65 (FIG. 129 (3)) is displayed. The effect control device 300 performs notification regarding the setting change until a predetermined notification end trigger is established even after the transition to the control state S5.
At this time, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the corresponding game display (for example, the customer waiting screen 866) after receiving the command related to game control. The effect control device 300 further displays a RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure notification regarding the RAM clear. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the notification end trigger is established, so that the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 can be displayed even after the game control is started. The control state can be easily grasped. Note that the effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 using effects such as blinking display and scroll display. The notification end trigger may be a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) or a predetermined condition (front frame 1).
2 occlusion detection, game start detection by winning detection, etc., execution of a predetermined number of fluctuation display games (for example, execution of a special figure game fluctuation display once), push button 25 pressing operation detection, and the like.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays a notification content that has been started while the front frame 12 is opened, and ends a predetermined notification after the opening of the front frame 12 in order to ensure notification on the display device 41 to the game hall staff. Trigger establishment (for example, detection of pressing operation of push button 25, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.)
May be continued.

Next, a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clearing in speakers 19a and 19b (sound output devices) which are one of the production devices will be described. First, FIG. 130 will be described with respect to a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of channels prepared for sound output. FIG. 130 shows a notification regarding the setting change and R in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.
It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of alerting | reporting regarding AM clear.

The production control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and notifies from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels prepared for sound output from timing t0. Sound A and notification sound B are output. For example,
The production control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B in synchronization with channel 1 and channel 2 (FIG. 130 (1)). Then, the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and uses the plurality of channels prepared for sound output from the timing t4 to notify the sound A and the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. C is output. For example, the production control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with channel 1 and channel 2. And the production control device 300 uses the notification sound A.
The sound output from the channel that repeatedly outputs the sound and the notification sound C is switched to the game control sound D at a timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

The notification sound A includes an alarm sound for notifying RAM clear (for example, an electronic sound “Pune, Pune”) and a message for notifying RAM clear (for example, “RAM has been initialized”). Note that the notification sound A may include one of an alarm sound and a message.

In addition, the notification sound B includes an alert sound 1 for notifying that the probability setting is being changed (for example, an electronic sound “Pippi, Pippy”) and a message for notifying that the probability setting is being changed (for example, “the probability setting is being changed”). including. Note that the notification sound B may include one of the alert sound 1 and the message.

Further, the notification sound C includes a warning sound 2 (for example, an electronic sound “Pylori, Pylori”) for notifying the probability setting confirmation and a message (for example, “the probability setting has been changed”) for notifying the probability setting confirmation. including. Note that the notification sound C may include one of the alert sound 2 and the message. The game control sound D includes BGM and sound effects according to the game control state.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can suppress simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs the probability setting change work,
Since the RAM clear notification sound does not become an obstacle to the notification sound during the probability setting change, it is possible to suitably guide the operator that the probability setting is being changed. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who has performed the probability setting change work that the RAM has been cleared and the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). In addition, when the probability setting is confirmed, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the operator that the probability setting has been confirmed because the RAM clear notification sound does not interfere with the probability setting confirmation notification sound. it can. Such a gaming machine 10
Can provide a good working environment for the operator who performs the setting operation.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may change the notification sound for each channel when outputting the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels. For example, when the production control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command and a probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from timing t0, the notification sound A is assigned to channel 1 and the notification sound is sent to channel 2. B is assigned (FIG. 130 (2))
). At this time, the production control device 300 performs alternate output so that the sound is not output at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound B overlap. In addition, when the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from timing t4, the production control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the channel 1 and assigns the notification sound C to the channel 2. At this time, the production control device 3
00 is an alternate output so that no sound is output at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound C overlap. And the production control device 300 is the timing t when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.
6, the channels 1 and 2 are switched to the game control sound D.

Moreover, when the notification sound A and the notification sound B are output from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels, the production control device 300 makes the notification sound different for each channel and outputs different notification sounds. An interval period Δt may be provided between them (FIG. 1).
30 (3)). For example, when the production control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command and a probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from timing t0, the notification sound A is assigned to channel 1 and the notification sound is sent to channel 2. Assign B. Then, the effect control apparatus 300 outputs the notification sound B from the channel 2 after outputting the notification sound A from the channel 1 and then waiting for the interval period Δt. Similarly, the production control device 300
After outputting the notification sound B from the channel 2, the notification sound A is output from the channel 1 after waiting for the interval period Δt. Thereafter, the effect control device 300 repeats the same cycle. In addition, the effect control apparatus 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period, or may set it as an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). Further, the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and receives the timing t4.
When more sound is output, notification sound A is assigned to channel 1, notification sound C is assigned to channel 2, and interval period Δt is set when notification sound A and notification sound C are alternately output. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the channels 1 and 2 to the game control sound D at the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

The production control device 300 sets the interval period Δt when switching the notification sound even when the notification sound is repeatedly output in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2 as shown in FIG. 130 (1). You may make it do.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may assign a specific channel to a specific speaker. For example, of the speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R), the speaker 19a (L) outputs the notification sound set for the channel 1 and does not output the notification sound set for the channel 2. Further, the speaker 19a (R) outputs the notification sound set for the channel 2 and does not output the notification sound set for the channel 1.

Next, FIG. 131 will be described with respect to a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 131 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) prepared for sound output from timing t0. , 19b using at least two of notification sound A and notification sound B
And output sound. For example, the production control device 300 includes a speaker L (speaker 19a (L)
) And the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)), the notification sound A and the notification sound B are repeatedly output in synchronization (FIG. 131 (1)). Then, the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C from the speaker L and the speaker R at timing t4. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with the speaker L and the speaker R. Then, the production control device 300 outputs the sound output from the speaker L and the speaker R that repeatedly output the notification sound A and the notification sound C from the timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.
Switch to.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can suppress simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs the probability setting change work,
Since the RAM clear notification sound does not become an obstacle to the notification sound during the probability setting change, it is possible to suitably guide the operator that the probability setting is being changed. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who has performed the probability setting change work that the RAM has been cleared and the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). In addition, when the probability setting is confirmed, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the operator that the probability setting has been confirmed because the RAM clear notification sound does not interfere with the probability setting confirmation notification sound. it can. Such a gaming machine 10
Can provide a good working environment for the operator who performs the setting operation.

In addition, when the production control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speaker L and the speaker R, the notification sound may be different for each speaker. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command and a probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the notification sound to the speaker R. B is assigned (FIG. 131 (2)). At this time, the production control device 3
00 is alternately output so that the sound is not output at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound B overlap. Further, when the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t4, the production control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the speaker R.
Notification sound C is assigned to. At this time, the production control device 300 performs the alternate output so that the sound is not output at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound C overlap. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the speakers L and R to the game control sound D at a timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

In addition, when the production control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speakers L and R, the notification control device 300 makes the notification sound different for each speaker and outputs different notification sounds for an interval period. Δt may be provided (FIG. 131 (3)). For example,
When the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the performance control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and outputs the notification sound B to the speaker R. assign. And the production control apparatus 300 is the speaker L
After the notification sound A is output from, the notification sound B is output from the speaker R after waiting for the interval period Δt. Similarly, the production control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L after waiting for the interval period Δt after outputting the notification sound B from the speaker R. Thereafter, the effect control device 300 repeats the same cycle. In addition, the effect control apparatus 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period, or may set it as an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). Further, when the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from timing t4, the production control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L, assigns the notification sound C to the speaker R, and notifies the notification sound A. And the notification sound C are alternately output, the interval period Δt is set. And the production control device 300 performs the timing t
The speaker L, R is switched to the game control sound D at a timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from 4.

In addition, the production control device 300 has the speaker L and the speaker R as shown in FIG. 131 (1).
The interval period Δt may be set when the notification sound is switched, even when the notification sound is repeatedly output in synchronization with each other.

Note that although the gaming machine 10 sets the speakers that output different notification sounds according to the left and right arrangement of the gaming machines 10, it may be set according to the speaker characteristics such as the vertical arrangement and the high and low sound output.

Next, FIG. 132 will be described with respect to a notification mode when sound output control is performed simultaneously on different notification sounds using a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment (
Part 3).

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) prepared for sound output from timing t0. , 19b using at least two of notification sound A and notification sound B
And sound output control. For example, the production control device 300 starts sound output control from the timing t0 and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A through the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)). In addition, the production control device 300 starts sound output control from the timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound B through the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). Then, the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, switches the notification sound at timing t4, starts sound output control, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L. In addition, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control by switching the notification sound from timing t4, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R. Then, the production control device 300 outputs the sound output from the speaker L that repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the speaker R that repeatedly outputs the notification sound C from timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t4. Switch to game control sound D and start sound output control.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 controls the sound output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B simultaneously. In this way, the production control device 300 can suppress the control load because it eliminates the need for control with different timings by simultaneously performing sound output control of different notification sounds.

The output modes of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of different notification sound output modes in the case where the different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously subjected to sound output control. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of different notification sound output modes in the case where sound output control is performed simultaneously on different notification sounds according to the seventh embodiment.

The production control device 300 starts sound output control from the timing t4, outputs the notification sound A by the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)), and outputs the notification sound C by the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). (FIG. 133 (1)).

At this time, the speaker L is on the shaft support side of the front frame 12, and the speaker R is on the open end side of the front frame 12. Therefore, when an operator (for example, a game hall clerk) opens the front frame 12 and performs a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation, the speaker R is more effective than the sound output from the speaker L.
The sound output from is easier to hear.

Therefore, even if the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output simultaneously (FIG. 133 (2)), the production control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the support side, By outputting sound of the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, the notification effect of the notification sound related to the work of the worker is ensured.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. The production control device 300 outputs a notification sound having a small degree of relation to the work of the worker from the speaker L on the pivot support side, and outputs a notification sound having a large degree of relation to the work of the worker on the open-end side speaker. Although a sound is output from R, a speaker that outputs a notification sound may be set according to the presence / absence of the degree of relation to the work of the worker and the work procedure.

In addition, the production control device 300 may exclusively output sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not simultaneously output (FIG. 133 (3)). For example, the production control device 300
When the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side, and the sound is muted at the timing t4a. On the other hand, when starting the sound output control from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound in the mute state, and waits for the timing t4a to output the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the pivot support side and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, while the notification sound related to the work of the operator. The notification effect is more suitably secured. The production control device 300 outputs sound from the speaker L on the pivot side first and then outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side with a delay, but first outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side. Thus, sound may be output from the speaker L on the shaft support side after a delay. In addition, the production control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L first,
Although the notification sound C is output from the speaker R with a delay, the notification sound C having a large degree of relation to the worker's work is first output from the speaker L, and the degree of relation to the worker's work is small. The notification sound A may be output from the speaker R later.

Further, if the sound output at the maximum volume of the notification sound A and the sound output at the maximum volume of the notification sound C are exclusive, the effect control device 300 allows the sound output to overlap at some timing. May be. For example, when the production control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4,
The notification sound A is immediately output from the shaft-side speaker L and silenced at timing t4b (FIG. 133 (4)). On the other hand, when the production control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the volume is increased while fading in from the mute state at the timing t4 to the maximum volume state at the timing t4b, and the notification sound C is sent to the open end side. Sound is output from the speaker R.

Further, when starting the sound output control from the timing t4, the production control device 300 immediately outputs the notification sound C from the speaker L on the pivot side, and mutes the sound while fading out from the timing t4c (FIG. 134 (1)). . On the other hand, when starting the sound output control from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound in the mute state, and waits for the timing t4c to output the notification sound A from the speaker L on the pivot support side.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the pivot support side, and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, so that the maximum volume of the two notification sounds overlaps. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 achieves both security of the notification effect of the two notification sounds and security of the notification effect of the notification sound related to the work of the worker.

The production control device 300 fades in for one of the notification sounds (FIG. 133 (4)).
Alternatively, although fading out (FIG. 134 (1)), the two notification sounds may be faded in or out. For example, the production control device 3
00 may output the notification sound A and the notification sound C by fading in, may output the notification sound A and the notification sound C by fading out, or may output the notification sound A by fading in. The notification sound C may be output by fading out, or the notification sound C may be output by fading in and the notification sound A may be output by fading out.

In addition, the production control device 300 fades in for one of the notification sounds (FIG. 133 (4)).
Alternatively, although fading out (FIG. 134 (1)), it is possible to fade in and fade out for one of the notification sounds, or fade in and fade out for both (all) notification sounds.

Further, when the production control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4, the production control device 300 outputs the notification sound A at a volume suppressed from the pivot side speaker L, and outputs the notification sound C in a mute state. Waiting for timing t4d, the loudspeaker R on the open end side outputs a sound with a volume (for example, maximum volume) larger than the notification sound A (FIG. 134 (2)).

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. The production control device 300 outputs the notification sound C after waiting for the timing t4d, but may output the sound immediately from the timing t4.

In FIG. 133 (3), the production control device 300 outputs the sound exclusively so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output simultaneously. However, instead of putting one sound in the mute state. The sound output may be suppressed. For example, the production control device 300 outputs a non-suppressed sound (for example, maximum volume) when sound output control is started from the speaker L on the pivot support side at the timing t4 when sound output control is started from the timing t4. After that, a suppression sound is output after waiting for timing t4a. On the other hand, when controlling the sound output of the notification sound C at the timing t4 from the speaker R on the open end side, the effect control device 300 outputs the non-suppression sound after waiting for the timing t4a after outputting the suppression sound. Note that the suppression sound may be one in which the volume is suppressed, or may be one that suppresses a notification mode (notification message or warning sound, replacement or deletion of a warning sound, insertion of an interval period, or the like). .

Further, when the production control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4, the volume of the notification sound A is periodically changed so that the volume of the notification sound A is maximized at timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound A is minimized at timing t4f. You may make it make it. At this time, the production control device 300 periodically changes the volume so that the volume of the notification sound C is minimized at the timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound C is maximized at the timing t4f (FIG. 134 (3)). ).

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. In addition, although the production control device 300 sets a half-cycle time lag at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume, the timing lag at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C do not overlap the maximum sound volume. If it is, it will not be restricted to a half cycle.

In addition, when the production control apparatus 300 exclusively outputs the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output simultaneously, the number of notifications is the same in the notification example shown in FIG. 133 (3). ,
You may make it provide a difference in the frequency | count of alerting | reporting (FIG. 134 (4)). For example, the production control device 3
00, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, until the timing t4g, the notification sound A is output from the speaker L on the pivot side three times, and the notification sound C is output from the speaker R on the open end side to 1
The sound is output.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. Further, the gaming machine 10 can provide a difference in the notification effect of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. In addition, the production control device 300 changes the notification frequency to notify the sound A and the notification sound C.
However, it is also possible to provide a difference in the notification effect of the notification sound A and the notification sound C that the notification time is different.

In addition, although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output has been described, the present invention can also be applied to combinations of other notification sounds such as the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Moreover, although the case where the speaker L and the speaker R output the notification sound A and the notification sound C has been described, the speaker 19a (L
), 19a (R) and the speaker 19b, etc., and other combinations of speakers are also applicable. Moreover, although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output by the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, the present invention can also be applied to combinations of two or more channels such as channel 1 and channel 2.

Next, the power-on notification setting process according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the power-on notification setting process according to the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the power-on notification setting process when the received command is a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, a probability setting checking command, or a probability setting change instruction command.

[Step D331] The control unit determines whether a probability setting changing command has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D332 when the probability setting changing command is received, and proceeds to step D334 when not received.

[Step D332] The control unit sets a RAM clear notification and a setting change (probability setting change) notification. Thereby, the production control device 300 performs RAM clear notification and notification during probability setting change by a notification device (for example, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b). The control unit reduces the control load by simultaneously performing the RAM clear notification and the probability setting change notification.

[Step D333] The control unit sets a RAM clear notification and a termination trigger for notification of setting change (during probability setting change). For example, the end trigger for the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification is a transition from the control state S0 to the control state S5. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification end trigger.

[Step D334] The control unit determines whether or not a probability setting confirmation command has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D335 when a probability setting confirmation command is received, and proceeds to step D337 when not received.

[Step D335] The control unit sets notification during setting confirmation (during probability setting confirmation). As a result, the effect control device 300 can notify the notification device (for example, the display device 41 and the speaker 19a).
, 19b, etc.) is notified during the probability setting confirmation.

[Step D336] The control unit sets a notification end trigger during setting confirmation (under probability setting confirmation). For example, the end trigger of the notification during the probability setting confirmation is controlled from the control state S1 to the control state S1.
This is a transition to 3. The control unit ends the notification setting process at power-on after setting the end trigger for notification during confirmation of probability setting.

[Step D337] The control unit determines whether or not a RAM initialization command has been received.
The control unit proceeds to step D338 when the RAM initialization command is received, and proceeds to step D340 when not received.

[Step D338] The control unit sets a RAM clear (RAM initialization) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 can notify the notification device (for example, the display device 41 and the speaker 19a).
, 19b, etc.) RAM clear notification is performed.

[Step D339] The control unit sets a RAM clear notification end trigger. For example, the RAM clear notification end trigger is the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) after the transition from the control state S2 to the control state S5. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting a RAM clear notification end trigger.

[Step D340] The control unit sets a probability setting change instruction notification because the received command is not a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, or a probability setting checking command, that is, a probability setting changing instruction command. To do. Thereby, the production control device 300 issues a probability setting change instruction notification by a notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the probability setting change instruction notification. Since the control unit of the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change instruction command and prohibits RAM access and waits for a restart, the control unit of the effect control device 300 causes the probability setting change instruction notification end trigger. Does not require a set.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.
Next, the power-on notification end setting process of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the power-on notification end setting process according to the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification end setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). When the notification set in the power-on notification setting process is being executed,
Alternatively, the power-on notification end setting process is executed when the notification set in the power-on notification end setting process is being executed.

[Step D341] The control unit determines whether an end trigger for the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D342 when the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification end trigger are satisfied, and proceeds to step D344 when not satisfied.

[Step D342] The control unit terminates the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification, and the RAM
Clear notification and setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification are set. Thereby, the production control device 3
00 is stored in the RAM by a notification device (for example, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b).
Clear notification and probability setting confirmation notification are performed.

[Step D343] The control unit sets an end trigger for RAM clear notification and probability setting (probability setting confirmation) notification. For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the start of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification. The control unit ends the power-on notification end setting process after setting the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification end trigger.

[Step D344] The control unit determines whether an end trigger for RAM clear notification and setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D345 when an end trigger for RAM clear notification and probability setting confirmation notification is established, and proceeds to step D346 if not established.

[Step D345] The control unit ends (clears) the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification, and ends the power-on notification end setting process.
[Step D346] The control unit determines whether a notification end trigger is established during setting confirmation (under probability setting confirmation). The control unit proceeds to step D347 when the end trigger of notification during confirmation of probability setting is established, and proceeds to step D348 when it is not established.

[Step D347] The control unit terminates (clears) notification that setting is being confirmed (probability setting is being confirmed).
Then, the power-on notification end setting process ends.
[Step D348] The control unit determines whether or not a RAM clear notification end trigger has been established. The control unit proceeds to step D349 when the RAM clear notification end trigger is satisfied, and ends the power-on notification end setting process when the RAM clear notification end trigger is not satisfied.

[Step D349] The control unit ends (clears) the RAM clear notification, and ends the power-on notification end setting process.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.

In the power-on notification setting process, the control unit considers that there is RAM initialization by receiving the probability setting changing command because the probability setting change involves RAM clearing, but in step D331, the probability setting changing command In addition to receiving the above, reception of a RAM initialization command may be added to the determination requirement. That is, the control unit determines whether or not a RAM initialization command and a probability setting changing command have been received. When the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command are received, the control unit proceeds to step D332, When the command for changing the probability setting and the command for changing the probability setting are not received, the process may proceed to step D334.

In this case, the control unit receives other commands (for example,
The RAM clear notification mode and notification timing can be changed depending on whether or not the probability setting changing command is received. For example, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification by a notification device (for example, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b) when the command for changing the probability setting is not received when the RAM initialization command is received, and the RAM When a probability setting change command is received when the initialization command is received, a RAM clear notification and a setting change notification are performed by a notification device (for example, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b).

Note that the control unit determines whether or not to change the notification mode and notification timing of RAM clear.
Whether other commands are received or not when the RAM initialization command is received.
It may be determined whether or not another command (for example, a probability setting changing command) is received within a predetermined time from the reception of the M initialization command.

The change of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 137 shows the RA of the seventh embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of alerting | reporting aspect of RAM clear alerting | reporting according to the receiving conditions of M initialization command. FIG. 138 shows an R according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of alerting | reporting aspect of AM clear alerting | reporting. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command after power-on (FIG. 137).
In (1)), a RAM clear notification up to timing t10 is performed by a notification device (for example, display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.).

In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after power-on (FIG. 137 (2)), the notification device notifies the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification (probability setting change). Medium notification). The production control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then the timing t
The setting confirmation notification (probability setting confirmation notification) is performed only during a period T1 from 11 to timing t12. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from timing t12 to timing t13 which is further delayed by a period T2.

Thus, the production control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
137 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 137 (2)), R
A different notification period is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the setting change notification.

In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after power-on (FIG. 137 (3)), the notification device sets the RAM clear to non-notification and notifies the setting change notification. Do it. The effect control device 300 performs the setting confirmation notification for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 after performing the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. The effect control device 300 issues a RAM clear notification until a timing t13 delayed by a period T2 from the timing t12.

Thus, the production control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
137 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 137 (3)), R
A different notification start time is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the setting change notification.

Note that the gaming machine 10 determines that the RAM clear notification notification period and the notification start timing are different depending on whether or not a probability setting changing command (may be another command such as a probability setting confirmation command) is received. The notification end time, notification volume, notification content, notification frequency, and other notification modes of the clear notification may be different.

The production control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after turning on the power.
A predetermined delay period Δt may be provided and the RAM clear notification up to timing t10 may be performed by the notification device (FIG. 138 (1)).

Further, when the production control device 300 receives a command for changing probability setting during a predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving a RAM initialization command after power-on, the delay period Δt has elapsed since the reception of the RAM initialization command. Later, the notification device may perform a RAM clear notification and a setting change notification (FIG. 138 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs the setting confirmation notification for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 after performing the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from timing t12 to timing t13 which is further delayed by a period T2.

Even in such a case, the production control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command (FIG. 138 (1)) and the probability setting changing command (FIG. 138 (1)).
2)), a different notification period is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the RAM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification regardless of the presence or absence of the setting change notification.

In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives a command for changing probability setting during a predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving a RAM initialization command after power-on (FIG. 139 (1)), the notification device The RAM clear is not notified and the setting change notification is made. The effect control device 300 performs the setting confirmation notification for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 after performing the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. The production control device 300 has a timing t delayed by a period T2 from the timing t12.
RAM clear notification up to 13.

Thus, the production control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
138 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 139 (1)), R
A different notification start time is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the setting change notification.

Note that the gaming machine 10 determines that the RAM clear notification notification period and notification start time differ depending on whether or not the probability setting changing command (other commands) is received, but the RAM clear notification notification end timing, notification volume, notification The contents, notification frequency, and other notification modes may be different.

Further, when the production control device 300 receives a command for changing probability setting during a predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving a RAM initialization command after power-on, the delay period Δt has elapsed since the reception of the RAM initialization command. Later, the notification device may notify that the RAM clear is not performed and the setting is being changed (FIG. 139 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs the setting confirmation notification for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 after performing the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. Since the effect control device 300 executes the probability setting change and the RAM clear as a pair, the RAM clear that is naturally performed may be omitted by the setting change notification. In other words, even if the production control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command after power-on, it depends on whether or not a command for changing probability setting (may be another command such as a probability setting confirmation command) is received. Decide whether to clear RAM. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can omit the RAM clear notification which is naturally understood by the setting change notification. Such a gaming machine 10 can simplify the contents of notification, and the situation can be easily grasped by the operator.

Further, when the RAM control command is received after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (1)), the effect control device 300 performs speaker L, R, B (for example, speaker 19a (L), speaker 1).
9a (R), speaker 19b (B)), RAM clear notification is performed at the maximum volume until timing t20.

Further, the effect control device 300 receives the speaker L (for example, the speaker 19a) when the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command are received after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (2)).
(L)), the sound volume suppressed until timing t21 when the probability setting confirmation command is received (
For example, RAM clear notification is performed at half the maximum volume, and a predetermined mute period (for example, 10 seconds) is provided until timing t22, and then for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) at the maximum volume.
The RAM clear notification is performed. In addition, the production control device 300 is a speaker R (for example,
The setting change notification (probability setting change notification) is performed at the maximum volume until timing t21 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker 19a (R)). Also, the production control device 300
Is a setting confirmation notification at the maximum volume from the timing t21 to the timing t22 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker B (for example, the speaker 19b) (probability setting confirmation notification).
To do.

Thus, the production control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
140 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 140 (2)), R
Different notification periods, different notification devices, and different notification intensities (for example, volume) are set for RAM clear notification based on reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of the setting change notification.

Next, a modified example of the control state after power-on in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described with reference to FIG. 127 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control state after power is turned on in the gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S3 according to the input state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The gaming control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on and the setting key switch 127 is turned on when the power is turned on. In addition, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off and the setting key switch 127 is turned on when the power is turned on. In the game control device 100, the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the setting key switch 127 is turned on.
When is OFF, the control state S2 (RAM clear) is entered. In addition, the game control device 100
When the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OF.
When F, the control state S3 (power failure recovery) is entered.

In addition, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is OFF in the control state S0.
Then, the control state S2 (RAM clear) is entered. In addition, when the setting key switch 127 is turned OFF in the control state S1, the game control device 100 transitions to the control state S3. Further, the game control device 100 controls the control state S5 (after the RAM is cleared in the control state S2.
Transition to gaming state. In addition, when the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, the game control apparatus 100 shifts to the control state S4 (abnormality), If it is not detected (that is, data is normal), the process proceeds to the control state S5.

The game control device 100 is in the effect control device 300 in the control state S0 (setting change state).
A command to change the probability setting is sent to. Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S0, and notifies the setting change state using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting value being changed in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the setting value being changed in the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting device is in the setting change state by the effect device.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S2 (RAM clear). Thereby, the production control device 300 detects the confirmation of the changed setting value, and notifies the confirmation of the setting value using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the set value determined in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall attendant can confirm the set value confirmed in the probability set value display device 136 and can confirm that the set value has been confirmed by the effect device. Note that the game control device 100 may transmit a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when the control state S0 shifts to the control state S2.

The game control device 100 is the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state).
A command for confirming the probability setting is sent to. Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm that the setting device is in the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (power failure recovery). Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 detects completion | finish of a setting confirmation state, and alert | reports the completion | finish of a setting confirmation state using an effect production apparatus. In addition, the game control device 100 ends the display of the set value on the probability set value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall attendant can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has been terminated by the effect device. Note that the game control device 100 may not transmit a probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 may receive a command (in this case, a command received with a transition from the control state S3 to the control state S5). The end of the setting confirmation state may be detected by receiving a power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100 performs the effect control device 300 in the control state S2 (RAM clear).
A RAM initialization (RAM clear) command is transmitted. Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and uses the production device to perform R
Notify that there was AM clear. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm that the setting device is in the setting confirmation state.

In the control state S3 (power failure recovery), the game control device 100 transmits a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 when abnormal data is detected, and ends abnormally. Thereby, the production control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has ended abnormally, and guides the setting change instruction using the production device because the normal set value has been lost. In addition, the game control device 100 puts the probability setting value display device 136 into a non-display state.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when data normality is detected in the control state S3. Thereby, the production control device 300
The game control device 100 detects that it is in the control state S5 and waits for reception of a command for effect control. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the state on the state display device 135 while hiding the probability setting value display device 136. Thereby, the game hall staff can confirm the transition to the gaming state, and can confirm the transition to the gaming state by resuming the game effect in the effect device.

The state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be a common display device, function as the probability setting value display device 136 in the control states S0 and S1, and in the control state S5, the state display device 135. It may function as.

Next, the guidance or notification of the control state in the rendering device of the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described. First, control state S0 (setting change state) to control state S2 (RA
M clear), the transition timing to the control state S5 (game state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) according to Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

In the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, the setting key switch 1
When 27 is ON, the control state S0 is entered. The gaming machine 10 is in the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF at the timing t1. Note that the gaming machine 10 accepts the RAM clear execution reservation by the transition to the control state S0, and therefore, the input state of the RAM initialization switch 112 after the transition to the control state S0 does not matter.

Each time the gaming machine 10 detects a pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126, the gaming machine 10 increments the preset setting value by “1”, and returns to “0” when the maximum setting value is exceeded. For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 at the timing t2, updates the preset setting value “5 (maximum value)” to “0”, and changes the setting value at the timing t3. The pressing operation of the switch 126 is detected and the set value is updated to “1”.

The gaming machine 10 detects OFF of the setting key switch 127 at timing t4 to confirm the update of the setting value, shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S2, performs RAM clear in the control state S2, and performs control after the RAM is cleared. Transition to state S5. However, the set value storage area is outside the initialization target area and is not initialized.

The gaming machine 10 performs notification regarding the setting change using the effect device in the control state S0, and performs notification regarding the setting change confirmation and notification regarding the RAM clear using the effect device after the control state S2.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment, the output mode of the notification sound differs depending on the installation position of the speaker. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of different notification sound output modes in the case where sound output control is performed on different notification sounds of the second modification of the seventh embodiment at the same time.
FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of different notification sound output modes in the case where sound output control is performed on different notification sounds of the second modification of the seventh embodiment at the same time. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of different notification sound output modes when sound output control is performed on different notification sounds of the second modification of the seventh embodiment at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 143 (1), the gaming machine 10 has a probability that the speaker on the pivotal support side of the front frame 12 (for example, the speaker 19a (L)) and the open end side speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (R)) A setting change notification and a RAM clear notification are performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and changes the notification mode between when the front frame 12 is closed and when it is opened.

For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “setting is being changed. RAM cleared. (Hereinafter loop)” from both the pivot support speaker and the open end speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Setting is being changed. (Hereinafter loop)”, and is notified from the open end speaker. Outputs the sound “Settings are being changed. Settings are being changed. RAM cleared. (Loop)”.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened, and the front frame 12
The notification content that is highly relevant to the work content is weighted and notified from the open-end side speaker at a position that is easy to hear for the worker who is working with the opening. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a front frame 1
The notification effect of the different notification contents is balanced by weighting the notification contents having low relevance to the work contents from the pivot side speaker located at a position that is difficult to hear for the worker who works by opening 2.

Note that the weighting on the notification content is not limited to the number of repetitions (the number of notifications), but may be notification time or notification volume, or any other one that provides a difference in notification effect. .

The game control device 100 can detect the opening of the front frame 12 by monitoring the input state of the main body frame opening detection switch 64, and the effect control device 300 can detect the game control that detects the opening of the front frame 12. The opening of the front frame 12 can be detected by receiving a required command from the device 100.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can detect the setting change work, the setting confirmation work, and the RAM clear work by the operator by detecting the opening of the front frame 12. The detection of the opening of the front frame 12 is an aspect of detection of setting change work, setting confirmation work, and RAM clear work by an operator, and may be performed by other methods.

Further, as shown in FIG. 143 (2), the gaming machine 10 has a work position remote speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (L)) on the front frame 12 and a speaker near the work position (for example, the speaker 1).
In 9b), the notification during the probability setting change and the RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and changes the notification mode between when the front frame 12 is closed and when it is opened.

For example, the gaming machine 10 generates a notification sound “setting is being changed. RAM cleared (hereinafter looped)” from both the remote speaker at the work position and the speaker near the work position when the front frame is closed.
Is output. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a notification sound “RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Settings are being changed. (Loop)” when the front frame is opened.
Is output from the speaker in the vicinity of the work position “Setting is being changed. Setting is being changed. RAM
Cleared. ("Loop") is output.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker when the front frame is opened, and the work is in a position that is easy to hear for an operator who works with the front frame 12 opened. The notification content having high relevance to the work content is notified from the position vicinity speaker with a weight. In addition, the gaming machine 10 weights the notification content that is less relevant to the work content from the work position remote speaker at a position that is difficult to hear for the worker who works by opening the front frame 12, and has different notification content. Balance the notification effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (1), the gaming machine 10 includes a pivotal speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (L)) and an open end speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
) May be used to notify the probability setting change and the RAM clear notification. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and changes the notification mode between when the front frame 12 is closed and when it is opened.

For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “setting is being changed. RAM cleared. (Hereinafter loop)” from both the pivot support speaker and the open end speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “settings are being changed. RAM cleared (hereinafter looped)” from the support side speaker, and the notification sound “
The setting is being changed. ("Loop") is output.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the notification sound of the pivot support side speaker the same when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened, and the notification sound of the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened. No. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 indicates a plurality of notification sounds (probability setting change notification sound and RAM when the front frame is opened)
Clear notification sound) is output to ensure the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. Meanwhile, gaming machine 10
Assists the operator's workability by outputting a notification sound (notification sound during change of probability setting) having high relevance to the work content from the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (2), the gaming machine 10 includes a pivotal speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (L)) and an open end speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
) May be used to notify the probability setting change and the RAM clear notification. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and changes the notification mode between when the front frame 12 is closed and when it is opened.

For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “setting is being changed. RAM cleared. (Hereinafter loop)” from both the pivot support speaker and the open end speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “RAM cleared (hereinafter looped)” from the pivot side speaker, and the notification sound “setting is being changed from the open end speaker”.
("Loop") is output.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened, and the front frame 12
The notification content having high relevance to the work content is notified from the open-end side speaker at a position that is easy to hear for the worker who works with the opening. In addition, the gaming machine 10 notifies the notification content having low relevance to the work content from the pivot-side speaker located at a position that is difficult to hear for the worker who works by opening the front frame 12.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (1), the gaming machine 10 includes a pivotal speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (L)) and an open end speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
) May be used to notify the probability setting change and the RAM clear notification. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and changes the notification mode between when the front frame 12 is closed and when it is opened.

For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “setting is being changed. RAM cleared. (Hereinafter loop)” from both the pivot support speaker and the open end speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound “Front frame is open. RAM cleared. (Hereinafter loop)” from the pivot support speaker when the front frame is open, and the notification sound “setting change” is output from the open end speaker. Is output (Loop).

Thus, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the gaming machine 10 includes a notification sound regarding the opening of the front frame in the notification sound of the pivot support speaker. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 differs in the notification sound of the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs a plurality of notification sounds (a notification sound while the front frame is open and a RAM clear notification sound) from the pivot support speaker when the front frame is opened, thereby ensuring the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 assists the operator's workability by outputting a notification sound (notification sound during change of probability setting) having high relevance to the work content from the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (2), the gaming machine 10 includes a front-side support speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (L)) and an open-end side speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
) And the notification volume may be different. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound with a preset volume set in advance from both the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound with a suppressed volume that is suppressed from the set volume from the pivot side speaker when the front frame is opened, and an enhanced volume (higher than the set volume from the open end side speaker).
For example, the notification sound is output at the maximum volume. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to those other than the worker.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (3), the gaming machine 10 includes a pivotal speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, a speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
) And the channel used may be different. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a maintenance channel (maintenance channel) among a plurality of channels that can be used for sound output.
Assign. The gaming machine 10 allows notification sound output from all channels from both the pivot support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. Further, the gaming machine 10 restricts the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel at the pivot support speaker when the front frame is opened, and allows the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel at the open end side speaker. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to those other than the worker.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (including modifications) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM1
11C), setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) And notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means executes the first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change and the second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information with an overlap period, and notifies the confirmation of the setting change. And the second sound output for notifying the clearing of the game information are executed while eliminating the overlap period (
128 to 131).

(2) The game information of (1) includes setting information.
(3) The gaming machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM1
11C), setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) And notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means includes a first video output for informing the confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for informing the clearing of the game information, a first sound output for informing the confirmation of the setting change, and the game information The second sound output for notifying the clear is executed with an overlap period, and the overlap of the maximum sound volume output period is eliminated by fading at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output. Sound output is executed (see FIGS. 128, 129, 133 (4), 134 (1), and (3)).

(4) The game information of (3) includes setting information.
(5) The notification control unit of (3) executes sound output by eliminating duplication of the maximum volume output period by fading in at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output ( (See FIG. 133 (4)).

(6) The notification control means of (3) executes sound output by eliminating duplication of the maximum volume output period by fading out at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output (
(See FIG. 134 (1)).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM1
11C), setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) And notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means includes a first video output for informing the confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for informing the clearing of the game information, a first sound output for informing the confirmation of the setting change, and the game information When the second sound output for notifying the clear is executed with an overlap period, one of the first sound output and the second sound output is increased by comparing with the other sound volume. Is given priority over the other notification (for example, timing t4 to t4b in FIG. 133 (1),
Priority is given to sound output from the speaker L before and after timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3), and priority is given to sound output from the speaker R before and after timing t4f in FIG. 134 (3). (See FIGS. 133 (4) and 134 (1), (2), (3)).

(8) The notification control means of (7) is configured to increase the volume of one of the first sound output and the second sound output in comparison with the volume of the other, thereby notifying one of the notifications to the other. The first priority period (for example, priority is given to the sound output from the speaker L before and after timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3)), and the other volume is made larger than the other volume to increase the other The second priority period (priority is given to the sound output from the speaker R before and after the timing t4f in FIG. 134 (3)) is set as the overlap period, and the sound output is executed (FIG. 134). (3
), (4)).

(9) The gaming machine 10 may be a main body (for example, outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface (for example, front frame (main body frame) 12 or glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), and a second sound output unit (for example,
Speaker 19a (R)) and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RA
M111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 126)
, Setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112), and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification) Device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body so as to be openable and closable with one side as an axis. The first sound output unit is provided on the axial side of the front surface part. The second sound output part is provided on the open end side of the front part. The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information, the second sound output unit performs either notification regarding setting change or notification regarding clearing of game information (FIG. 128, FIG. 129, see FIGS. 143 to 145).

(10) The gaming machine 10 may be a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good)
A first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, R
AM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 12)
6, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example,
Game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body so as to be openable and closable with one side as an axis. The first sound output unit is provided on the axial side of the front surface part. The second sound output part is provided on the open end side of the front part. The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means first performs notification regarding setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information.
When the sound output unit and the second sound output unit are used, the first sound output unit is set as the first notification mode,
The second sound output unit is set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (FIGS. 128, 129,
(See FIGS. 143 to 145).

(11) The game information of (9) or (10) includes setting information.
(12) The gaming machine 10 may be a main body (for example, outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface (for example, front frame (main body frame) 12 or glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good)
A first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, R
AM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 12)
6, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example,
Game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body so as to be openable and closable with one side as an axis. The first sound output unit is provided on the axial side of the front surface part. The second sound output part is provided on the open end side of the front part. The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding the setting change and notification regarding the clearing of the game information, either the notification regarding the setting change or the notification regarding the clearing of the game information in the second sound output unit in the open state where the front surface portion is opened. One of the priority notification states is given priority (see FIGS. 128, 129, and 143 to 145).

(13) The gaming machine 10 may be a main body (for example, outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface (for example, front frame (main body frame) 12 or glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good)
A first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, R
AM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 12)
6, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example,
Game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body so as to be openable and closable with one side as an axis. The first sound output unit is provided on the axial side of the front surface part. The second sound output part is provided on the open end side of the front part. The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding the setting change and notification regarding clearing of the game information in the open state in which the front surface portion is opened, the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit are displayed in the first notification mode. When the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the clearing of the game information are performed in the closed state where the front portion is closed, the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit are different from the first notification mode. 2 (see FIGS. 128, 129, and 143 to 145).

(14) The gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means performs game control. The production control means receives the command from the game control means and produces the production means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19).
b, the board production device 44, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM 111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127).
, Probability set value display device 136) and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM)
Initialization switch 112) and notification means (CPU unit 110, output unit 130). The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notifying means notifies the effect control means by the first command (for example, RAM clear command) that the game information has been cleared, and the second command (for example, the probability of the game performance setting has been changed). The effect control means is notified by a setting confirmation command. The effect control means includes first notification means, second notification means, and notification timing control means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies the effect means that the game information has been cleared. The second notification means receives the second command and notifies the effect means that the game performance setting has been changed. The notification timing control means is the first
When the command is received, the execution timing of the first notification means is changed according to whether or not the second command is received (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

(15) The gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means performs game control. The production control means receives the command from the game control means and produces the production means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19).
b, the board production device 44, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM 111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127).
, Probability set value display device 136) and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM)
Initialization switch 112) and notification means (CPU unit 110, output unit 130). The information holding means can hold game information before power is shut off. The setting means can change the setting to one game performance among two or more different game performances. The clearing unit clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notifying means notifies the effect control means by the first command (for example, RAM clear command) that the game information has been cleared, and the second command (for example, the probability is changed). The effect control means is notified by a setting confirmation command. The effect control means includes first notification means, second notification means, and notification timing control means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies the effect means that the game information has been cleared. The second notification means receives the second command and notifies the effect means that the game performance setting is being changed. The notification timing control means is the first
When the command is received, the execution timing of the first notification means is changed according to whether or not the second command is received (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

(16) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution start timing of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137 (1) and (3)).
(17) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution period of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137 (1), (2), (3)).

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment displays the detected error in the first display area of the display device when the detected error belongs to the first category,
When the detected error belongs to a second category different from the first category, the second of the display device
Display in the display area. Further, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment displays the first error in the second display area or the second display when the detected error belongs to the second category different from the first category. When two or more errors are displayed in the area, the two or more errors are displayed by cascade display arranged in a predetermined order. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment can cope with quick error handling even when a plurality of errors overlap.

First, an error display screen in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal display screen and an error occurrence display screen according to the eighth embodiment.

A display screen 868 shown in FIG. 146 (1) is a normal display screen in the display device 41. For example, the display screen 868 is a symbol-stopped display screen that stops and displays symbols before the start of variation in the variation display game. The display screen 868 displays a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 505, and a hold digest display 506. The display screen 868 is a first display area 87 that displays errors belonging to the first category.
The display area includes 0 and a second display area 880 for displaying errors belonging to the second category. However, since the display screen 868 is in a state where no error has occurred, the first display area 8
70 and the second display area 880 do not include display content related to an error.

A display screen 869 shown in FIG. 146 (2) is a display screen in which an error has occurred in the display device 41. The display screen 869 displays an error 87 belonging to the first category in the first display area 870.
01, 8702, 8703 are displayed. Further, the display screen 869 displays an error 8801 belonging to the second category in the second display area 880.

The gaming machine 10 has two or more errors in the first display area 870, for example, errors 8701 and 87.
When displaying 02, 8703, cascade display is performed in which two or more errors are displayed in a slightly shifted position. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to easily grasp the number of errors occurring at the same time, and to ensure sufficient discrimination for the error located at the forefront. For example, when multiple errors belonging to the first category are generated, the gaming machine 10 displays the error that should be alerted most to the notification target in the foreground. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 is the same when two or more errors are displayed in the second display area 880.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has only one error in the second display area 880, for example, error 880.
When 1 (overflow error) is displayed, the error is clearly identified. Note that the same is true when the gaming machine 10 displays only one error in the first display area 870.

It should be noted that the first display area 870 displays an error with higher importance (or urgency) than the second display area 880 by overlapping many display elements in the variable display game on the front side thereof. It has a side surface as a display area. For example, the first display area 870 is displayed so as to overlap the large symbol group 501, the hold display 505, and the hold digest display 506, but the second display area 880 is only displayed so as to overlap the large symbol group 501. . The gaming machine 10 displays the small symbol group 502, the special figure 1 hold number display 503, and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 at positions that do not overlap any of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880. Ensuring sufficient visibility and deter unexpected losses to the player.

Next, FIG. 14 shows errors belonging to the first category and errors belonging to the second category.
7 for explanation. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of error categories for each error according to the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 provides various errors. The gaming machine 10 classifies errors by type, and sets a priority order and an error category. For example, the gaming machine 10 includes a speaker 1
In error notification by sound output from 9a and 19b, an error having a high priority is notified in preference to an error having a low priority. In addition, in the error notification by the display output on the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 gives priority to an error having a high priority for each error category, and gives priority to an error having a low priority.

There are two types of errors related to the type “power-on”: “RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery”.
“RAM initialization (priority“ 1 ”)” is an error with the highest priority, and is subject to notification in preference to other errors. On the other hand, “power failure recovery (priority“ 16 ”)” is an error with the lowest priority, and is subject to notification after being subordinate to other errors.

The error related to the type “illegal” is an error that is notified when an event that prevents a fair game is detected. In order of increasing priority, “big prize opening illegal prize error (priority“ 2 ”)”, “
Unauthorized winning of electric power (priority level “3”), “magnetic error (priority level“ 4 ”)”, “panel radio wave error (priority level“ 5 ”)”, “frame radio wave error (priority level“ 6 ”) And “strong error reservation (priority order“ 7 ”)”.

The error related to the type “door open” is the error with the next highest priority after the type “incorrect”
There are “front frame opening error (priority“ 8 ”)” and “game frame opening error (priority“ 9 ”)”. The “front frame opening error” is an error that is output upon detection of opening of the glass frame 15, and the “game frame opening error” is an error that is output upon detection of opening of the front frame 12.

The error related to the type "mechanism" is the error with the second highest priority after the type "door open"
In order from the highest priority, "Starting port error (priority" 10 ")", "Switch error error (
Priority order “11”) ”and“ weak error reservation (priority order “12”) ”.

The error relating to the type “payout” is the error having the second highest priority after the type “mechanism”, and in the descending order of priority, the “shoot ball blow error (priority“ 13 ”)” and “overflow error (priority“ 14 ”)” and “payout abnormality error (priority“ 15 ”)”.

The strong error reservation and the weak error reservation are reservation errors for future error type expansion. The gaming machine 10 guarantees future error extensibility by reserving errors of different strengths in advance.

“RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery” belong to the error category “0”, and “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”, “frame” “Radio wave error” and “strong error reservation” belong to error category “1” and “front frame open error”
, “Game frame opening error”, “Starting port error”, “Switch error error”, “Weak error reservation”, “Shoot ball break error”, “Overflow error”, and “Payout error error”
Belongs to the error category “2”.

The error category “1” corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category “2” corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category “0” is displayed in the first display area 870 and the second display area 88.
This is an error category to which an error to be displayed independently of 0 belongs.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 classifies the error categories according to the priority order and displays the errors for each category, so that the error handling procedure can be easily understood and shown to the observer. For example, if an "overflow error", "big prize winning illegal prize error", "panel radio wave error", and "frame radio wave error" are duplicated, and all errors are displayed simultaneously, It may take time to grasp the contents, and it may take time to deal with errors. However, the gaming machine 10 displays “overflow error”, “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “panel radio wave error”, and “frame radio wave error” as shown on the display screen 869.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 has three errors with high priority from the display content of the first display area 870, and among them, the error to be dealt with with the highest priority is the “big winning mouth illegal prize error”, and An observer (for example, a game hall staff, a player, or the like) can easily grasp that there is one error having a low priority from the display content of the second display area 880. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can cope with quick error handling (for example, error cancellation) even when a plurality of errors overlap.

Note that the gaming machine 10 is not limited to classifying error categories according to priority,
The error category may be classified according to other criteria. Here, modified examples of error category classification will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of an error category for each error according to the modification of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 149 shows an example of error categories for each error in the modification of the eighth embodiment (part 2).
). FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of an error category for each error according to the modification of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of an error category for each error according to the modification of the eighth embodiment.

The error category classification shown in FIG. 148 classifies errors relating to the type “power-on” into the error category “0”, and classifies errors with external information output among the other errors into the error category “1”. Errors with no information output are classified into error category “2”.

That is, “RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery” belong to the error category “0”, and “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”,
“Frame radio wave error”, “strong error reservation”, “front frame open error”, and “game frame open error” belong to error category “1”, and “starting port error”, “switch abnormal error”, “weak” The “error reservation”, “shoot ball break error”, “overflow error”, and “payout abnormality error” belong to the error category “2”.

The error category “1” corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category “2” corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category “0” is displayed in the first display area 870 and the second display area 88.
This is an error category to which an error to be displayed independently of 0 belongs.

The external information output is a signal output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 via the external information terminal board 71. Normally, the game hall staff can know that there is an external information output from the gaming machine 10 through the hall facility. The gaming machine 10 can cause the game hall staff to confirm the display content of the first display area 870 to confirm the abnormality notified by the external information output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 classifies the error categories according to the presence / absence of external information output, and displays the error for each category, thereby making it easy to understand the error handling procedure and showing it to the observer. It should be noted that an error with external information output is an error that requires an urgent response by a game hall staff, and an error without external information output has an aspect that does not require an urgent response by a game hall staff. For example, for an error belonging to the type “illegal” such as “unusual prize error for big prize opening”, it is indispensable for the game hall staff to deal with in order to secure a fair game. On the other hand, the “overflow error” may be enough to alert the player, and there is a case where no action from the game hall staff is required.

The error category classification shown in FIG. 149 classifies an error relating to the type “power-on” into an error category “0”, and classifies an error with a sound (notification sound) output among the remaining errors into an error category “1”. Then, the error having no sound output is classified into the error category “2”.

That is, “RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery” belong to the error category “0”, and “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”,
“Frame radio wave error”, “strong error reservation”, “front frame open error”, and “game frame open error” belong to error category “1”, and “starting port error”, “switch abnormal error”, “weak” The “error reservation”, “shoot ball break error”, “overflow error”, and “payout abnormality error” belong to the error category “2”.

The error category “1” corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category “2” corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category “0” is displayed in the first display area 870 and the second display area 88.
This is an error category to which an error to be displayed independently of 0 belongs.

The sound output is a notification sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and includes an alarm sound and a voice message in the output content. The gaming machine 10 notifies the abnormality to the surroundings by emitting a notification sound from the speakers 19a, 19b. Note that the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound having a high priority in preference to an error notification sound having a low priority. The gaming machine 10 can cause the game hall staff to detect an abnormality from the notification sound and confirm the display contents of the first display area 870 to confirm all the abnormalities.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 classifies error categories according to the presence or absence of sound output,
By displaying an error for each category, the error handling procedure can be easily understood and shown to the observer. It should be noted that an error with sound output is an error that requires an urgent response by a game hall staff, and an error without sound output has an aspect that does not require an urgent response by a game hall staff. For example, for an error belonging to the type “illegal” such as “unusual prize error for big prize opening”, it is indispensable for the game hall staff to deal with in order to secure a fair game. On the other hand, the “overflow error” may be enough to alert the player, and there is a case where no action from the game hall staff is required.

Although the error category is classified according to the presence or absence of sound output, it may be classified according to the type of output target speaker. For example, an upper speaker (speaker 19
Errors output from a) are classified into error category “1”, and the lower speaker (speaker 1)
The error output from 9b) may be classified into the error category “2”.

The error category is classified according to the presence / absence of sound output, but is classified according to the presence / absence of notification output by other notification devices (for example, the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18). It may be a thing.

The error category classification shown in FIG. 150 classifies an error that does not require any special response only for confirmation (error related to the type “power-on”) into the error category “0”, and the responder is the administrator among the remaining errors. An error (for example, a game hall staff member) is classified into the error category “1”, and an error whose corresponding person is a player is classified into the error category “2”.

That is, “RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery” belong to the error category “0”, and “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”,
"Frame radio wave error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame open error", "Game frame open error", "
“Starting port error”, “Switch error error”, “Weak error reservation”, “Shoot ball break error”, and “Discharge error error” belong to error category “1”, and “Overflow error” has error category “2” Belongs to.

The error category “1” corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category “2” corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category “0” is displayed in the first display area 870 and the second display area 88.
This is an error category to which an error to be displayed independently of 0 belongs.

Note that an error that requires only a confirmation and does not require any special action is an error that is canceled after a predetermined time has passed although the occurrence of an event such as RAM initialization or power failure recovery is notified. An error in which the responder becomes an administrator is an error that prompts the administrator to eliminate the cause of the error. The error that the corresponding person is a player is an error that prompts the player to eliminate the cause of the error. For example, for an error that belongs to the type “illegal” such as “unusual prize error for big prize opening”, it is indispensable to solve the cause of the error by the game hall staff. On the other hand, if an “overflow error” is alerted to the player, the player can eliminate the ball removal operation.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 classifies the error category according to the type of responder,
By displaying an error for each category, it is possible to easily understand the error handling procedure and the target person and show it to the observer.

The error category classification shown in FIG. 151 classifies an error related to the type “power-on” into an error category “0”, classifies an error whose main error is the gaming control device 100 into an error category “1”, An error whose detection subject is the production control device 300 is classified into the error category “2”.

Note that the gaming machine 10 provides an error whose main error detection is the effect control device 300 in addition to the error main error detection device 100 shown in FIG. The gaming machine 10 includes an error related to the type “wiring” and an error related to the type “mechanism” as errors whose main error detection is the production control device 300.

The gaming machine 10 sets the priority order subordinate to the error whose main error detection is the production control device 300 to the error whose main error detection is the production control device 300. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets priorities “1” to “16” in the same manner as the errors shown in FIG. 147 and the like for errors whose error detection is the production control device 300, and the error detection main Priorities “17” to “20” are set for errors that are the controller 300.

There are two errors relating to the type “wiring”: “connector missing 1 (priority“ 17 ”)” and “connector missing 2 (priority“ 18 ”)”. For example, “connector missing 1” indicates an error in which the connection of one of the connectors connected to the effect control device 300 (for example, the connector connected to the lamp board and the relay board) cannot be confirmed. Also, “Connector missing 2”
This indicates an error in which the connection of one of the connectors connected to the effect control device 300 (for example, the connector connected to the relay board relaying the board effect device 44) cannot be confirmed.

Errors related to the type “mechanism” are “operation abnormality 1 (priority order“ 19 ”)” and “operation abnormality 2”.
(Priority “20”) ”. For example, “operation abnormality 1” indicates an error in which the operation state of one of the mechanisms (for example, the rotation mechanism) included in the board effect device 44 (such as the presence / absence of an operation and confirmation of the initial position) cannot be confirmed. Further, “operation abnormality 2” indicates an error in which the operation state of one of the mechanisms included in the board effect device 44 (for example, the slide mechanism) (such as the presence / absence of an operation and confirmation of the initial position) cannot be confirmed.

That is, “RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery” belong to the error category “0”, and “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”,
"Frame radio wave error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame open error", "Game frame open error", "
“Starting port error”, “Switch error error”, “Weak error reservation”, “Shoot ball break error”, “Overflow error”, and “Discharge error error” belong to error category “1” and “connector missing 1” , “Connector disconnection 2”, “operation abnormality 1”, and “operation abnormality 2”
"Belongs to the error category" 2 ".

The error category “1” corresponds to the first category to be displayed in the first display area 870, and the error category “2” corresponds to the second category to be displayed in the second display area 880. The error category “0” is displayed in the first display area 870 and the second display area 88.
This is an error category to which an error to be displayed independently of 0 belongs.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 classifies the error categories according to the error detection subject, and displays the error for each category, so that the error detection subject can be easily understood and shown to the observer.

Next, the display position and sound output for each error category will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display position and a sound output for each error category according to the eighth embodiment.

An error belonging to the error category “1” is an error whose display position is the first display area 870, and is displayed as a window B in the first display area 870. An error belonging to the error category “2” is an error in which the display position is the second display area 880, and the second display area 88
0 is displayed as window C. An error belonging to the error category “0” is an error that is set as a display position in a display area independent of the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.
It is displayed as window A in an independent display area. If an error occurs in each category, the error that overlaps in each category is displayed by cascading the corresponding windows.

In addition, for errors belonging to error category “0”, the sound output of notification sound is error category “1”.
And errors belonging to error category “2”. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound of an error belonging to the error category “0”, and even if an error belonging to the error category “1” and an error belonging to the error category “2” occur, the error category “1” The notification sound of the error belonging to error category “0” is not output and the notification sound of the error belonging to error category “2” is not output, and the notification sound of the error belonging to error category “0” is continued. Note that errors belonging to the error category “0” are always the highest level errors and there is no non-highest level error because “RAM initialization” and “power failure recovery” do not overlap.

In addition, for errors belonging to error category “1”, the sound output of the notification sound is error category “0”.
Is prior to errors belonging to error category “2”. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs no error notification sound belonging to the error category “1” when an error belonging to the error category “0” occurs while outputting the error notification sound belonging to the error category “1”. However, when an error belonging to the error category “2” occurs, the notification sound output of the error belonging to the error category “1” is continued. When errors belonging to the error category “1” are duplicated, the highest-level error notification sound is output, and the non-high-level error notification sound is not output (non-output). .

For errors belonging to error category “2”, the sound output of the notification sound is error category “0”.
”And subordinate to errors belonging to error category“ 1 ”. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error category “2” when an error belonging to the error category “0” or an error belonging to the error category “1” occurs while outputting the notification sound of the error belonging to the error category “2”. The notification sound of errors belonging to is not output. When errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated, the notification sound of the highest error is output and the notification sound of the non-highest error is not output (non-output). .

The gaming machine 10 can change the sound output mode according to the error overlap state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the observer of the error overlap state by the sound output mode of the error notification sound. The sound output mode for each error category will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound output mode for each error category according to the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 uses the error category “0” as the error notification sound belonging to the error category “0”.
Since an error belonging to “0” has priority over errors belonging to other categories and there is no duplication of errors belonging to the same category, only one sound output mode A is prepared. For example,
The sound output mode A includes a predetermined alarm sound and a voice message.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 prepares a sound output mode B1 as an error notification sound belonging to the error category “1” when no other error has occurred, and sounds when there is an overlap of errors belonging to the same category. An output mode B2 is prepared, and a sound output mode B3 is prepared when an error occurs in the lower category (error category “2”). Note that the gaming machine 10 sets the highest level error as a sound output target and does not set the non-highest level error as a sound output target when errors belonging to the error category “1” are duplicated. The sound output modes B1, B2, and B3 each include a predetermined alarm sound and a voice message, and have different sound output modes. For example, the sound output mode B1 is a voice message by the voice of the character A appearing during the game effect, and the sound output mode B2 is a voice message by the voice of the character B appearing during the game effect,
The sound output mode B3 is a voice message by the voice of the character C appearing in the game effect. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible for the observer to grasp the presence of an error that overlaps with an error belonging to the error category “1” depending on which voice message is the voice message of the character.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 prepares a sound output mode C1 as an error notification sound belonging to the error category “2” when no other error occurs, and sounds when there is an overlap of errors belonging to the same category. An output mode C2 is prepared. The gaming machine 10 has an error category “2”.
When an error belonging to is duplicated, the highest error is targeted for sound output, and the non-highest error is not targeted for sound output. Each of the sound output modes C1 and C2 includes a predetermined alarm sound and a voice message, and has different sound output modes. For example, the sound output mode C1 is a voice message based on the voice of the character A appearing during the game effect, and the sound output mode C2 is a voice message based on the voice of the character B appearing during the game effect. This
The gaming machine 10 can allow the observer to grasp the presence of an error that overlaps with an error belonging to the error category “2” depending on which character's voice message is a voice message.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can guide the presence / absence of a duplicate error depending on the difference in sound output mode. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to improving the workability of error cancellation when the display content of the display device 41 cannot be confirmed such as during work involving opening of the front frame 12.

Note that the gaming machine 10 expresses the difference in the sound output mode by the character appearing in the game effect, but if the difference in the sound output mode can be recognized, the volume, tempo, alarm sound, voice message, etc. It may be expressed by a difference in other elements.

Note that the gaming machine 10 changes the sound output mode according to the error overlap state, but the sound output device may be changed according to the error overlap state. Here, a modified example of the error overlap state notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound output device for each error category according to a modification of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of sound output devices. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 includes speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b on the front side of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 126). The speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) are provided on the upper portion of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 1), and are provided with a speaker 19a (L) on the left side when viewed from the front side of the front frame 12, and the speaker 19a ( R)
Is provided. The speaker 19b is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and above the operation unit 24 (see FIG. 1). The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b can independently output sound.

When an error belonging to the error category “0” occurs, the gaming machine 10
Since errors belonging to “0” have priority over errors belonging to other categories and there is no duplication of errors belonging to the same category, all speakers (speakers 19a (L), 19
A notification sound is output from a (R), 19b).

In addition, when an error belonging to the error category “1” occurs, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound from all speakers when no other error has occurred. The gaming machine 10
When duplication of errors belonging to the error category “1” occurs, the upper speaker (speaker 19a (
L), 19a (R)), the highest error notification sound is output, and the lower speaker (speaker 19b) is output.
) To output a non-highest error notification sound. If there are multiple non-top level errors,
Among the non-highest errors, the highest error is set as a notification sound output target, and the remaining errors are not set as notification sound output targets.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible for the observer to grasp the presence of an error that overlaps with an error belonging to the error category “1” depending on which speaker outputs the notification sound.

In addition, when an error belonging to the error category “2” occurs, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound from the lower speaker when no other error occurs, and when an error belonging to the error category “2” occurs. The highest error notification sound is output from the lower speaker, and the non-highest error notification sound is not output. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible for the observer to sequentially grasp errors belonging to the error category “2”. Further, when an error belonging to the error category “2” occurs, the gaming machine 10 does not output an error notification sound from the upper speaker, and therefore can output an error notification sound in parallel with the game effect (production sound output).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can guide the presence / absence of the duplicate error and the error priority according to the difference in the sound output device. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to improving the workability of error cancellation when the display content of the display device 41 cannot be confirmed such as during work involving opening of the front frame 12.

Next, the abnormality notification mode determination process of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of abnormality notification mode determination processing according to the eighth embodiment. The abnormality notification mode determination process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in the loop process of steps D18 to D31 of the main process (see FIG. 49).

[Step D351] The control unit collects abnormality information. The control unit is a game control device 100.
Abnormal information can be collected by receiving single-shot commands sent from the. The abnormality information is information relating to the occurrence and resolution of errors. The control unit is a production control device 300.
Can also be included in the collection target of abnormality information.

[Step D352] The control unit determines whether there is an abnormality to be notified from the collected abnormality information. The control unit proceeds to step D353 when there is an abnormality to be notified, and ends the abnormality notification mode determination process when there is no abnormality to be notified.

[Step D353] The control unit classifies errors that are occurring by category. For example,
The controller can refer to a table as shown in FIG. 147 to determine an error category for each error, and classify the error that is occurring by category.

[Step D354] When a plurality of errors occur in the same category, the control unit arranges the errors that are occurring in a predetermined order (for example, an order according to the priority order), and determines the highest level for each category.

[Step D355] The control unit sets a display mode for each category in the display device 41 according to the result of the alignment for each category.
[Step D356] The control unit determines whether the speaker 19a (L
), 19a (R), 19b, the sound output mode for each category is set, and the abnormality notification mode determination process is terminated.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform display output and sound output related to error notification after classifying the errors that are occurring into categories.
Next, display examples of error display areas (for example, the first display area 870 and the second display area 880) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158. FIG. FIG.
It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the error display mode of 8th Embodiment. FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of the error display mode according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of an error display mode according to the eighth embodiment.

The display device 41 includes a first display area 870, a second display area 880, and a third display area 890. The first display area 870 is a display area for displaying errors belonging to the error category “1”, and the second display area 880 is a display area for displaying errors belonging to the error category “2”, and is a third display area. Reference numeral 890 denotes a display area for displaying errors belonging to the error category “0”.

First, an error display area in a state where no error has occurred will be described. FIG. 156 (1
), The first display area 870 and the second display area 880 are in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other, and the third display area 890 includes the first display area 870 and the second display area 8.
80 is in a positional relationship having an overlapping area. For example, the first display area 870 and the second display area 880 are arranged in a vertical direction with a predetermined gap, and the third display area 890 includes the first display area 870 and the second display area 880. It is arranged in the central part so as to straddle. The first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890 do not perform notification display regarding an error in a state where any error has not occurred. The first display area 8
70, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890 are displayed with priority over the display relating to the game effect, as shown in FIG.

Next, an error display area where only one error belonging to the error category “0” has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 156 (2), when an error belonging to the error category “0”, for example, “RAM initialization” occurs, the gaming machine 10 displays the error window 8901 corresponding to “RAM initialization” in a third manner. Displayed in area 890. An error window 8901 is rectangular and displays an error message and a model code. The error message is a message that informs the initialization of the RAM (for example, “RAM cleared”), and the model code is information that can identify the model (series machine) (for example, the code “01”).
It is. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 890.

Next, an error display area in a state where only one error belonging to the error category “1” has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 156 (3), when the gaming machine 10 generates an error belonging to the error category “1”, for example, a “big winning mouth illegal winning error”, an error corresponding to the “big winning mouth illegal winning error” A window 8701 is displayed in the first display area 870. The error window 8701 is rectangular and displays an error message. The error message is a message (for example, “big winning mouth illegal winning error”) for notifying a big winning mouth illegal winning. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the first display area 870.

Next, an error display area where only one error belonging to the error category “2” has occurred will be described. As shown in FIG. 157 (1), when an error belonging to the error category “2”, for example, an “overflow error” occurs, the gaming machine 10 displays an error window 8801 corresponding to the “overflow error” in the second display area 880. To display.
The error window 8801 is rectangular and displays an error message. The error message is a message for reporting an overflow (for example, “overflow error”). At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the second display area 880.

Next, one error belonging to error category “1” and one belonging to error category “2”
An error display area in a state where two errors are duplicated will be described. Fig. 157
As shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 has errors belonging to the error category “1” (for example,
An error window 8701 corresponding to “big prize winning illegal prize error”) is displayed in the first display area 87.
An error window 8801 corresponding to an error belonging to the error category “2” (for example, “overflow error”) is displayed in the second display area 880. At this time,
The gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the first display area 870.

Next, an error display area in a state where two errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 157 (3), the gaming machine 10 corresponds to an “overflow error” when two errors belonging to the error category “2”, for example, an “overflow error” and a “payout abnormality error” occur. Error window 8801
And an error window 8802 corresponding to the “payout abnormality error” are displayed in cascade in the second display area 880.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays an error window 8801 corresponding to the “overflow error” having a higher priority among the “overflow error (priority“ 14 ”)” and the “payout abnormality error (priority“ 15 ”)”. Error window 88 corresponding to “Discharge Abnormal Error”
Display in front of 02. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error window 8801 being displayed on the front side in the second display area 880.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 guides the observer that two errors belonging to the error category “2” are generated in duplicate, and has better visibility than the “payout abnormality error”. Informs that "overflow error" is a high priority error.
Of the two windows, a window on the back side (for example, an error window 880).
Regarding the visibility of 2), a part of the message may be displayed so that it can be specified when carefully observed, or it can be specified so as not to put unnecessary burden on the observer. Good.

Note that even in a state where two errors belonging to the error category “1” are duplicated, it can be the same as a state where two errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated. .

In the case where an “outflow error” occurs in the state where the “overflow error” shown in FIG. 157 (1) has occurred, the “outflow error error” generated later is the back side of the “overflow error”. It became. This is because "Discharge Abnormal Error" is "Overflow Error"
Is due to lower priority.

On the other hand, when an error having a higher priority than the “overflow error” occurs in the state where the “overflow error” shown in FIG.
As shown in (1). In other words, the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the “overflow error (priority order“ 14 ”)” belonging to the error category “2” has occurred first, and the “shooting ball break error (priority order) belonging to the error category“ 2 ”. When “13”) occurs, an error window 8801 corresponding to the “overflow error” and an error window 8803 corresponding to the “shoot-out error” are displayed in cascade in the second display area 880.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays an error window 8803 corresponding to a “shoot ball break error” having a higher priority among “overflow error” and “shoot ball break error”.
It is displayed in front of an error window 8801 corresponding to “overflow error”. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays the error window 880 being displayed on the front side in the second display area 880.
An error notification sound corresponding to 3 is output.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 informs the observer that two errors belonging to the error category “2” are generated in duplicate, and has a better visibility than the “overflow error”. It is guided that the “shooting ball break error” is a high priority error. Of the two windows, the visibility of the window on the back side (for example, the error window 8801) may be specified by observing carefully so that a part of the message is displayed. It may be impossible to specify the user so as not to place an unnecessary burden on the user.

Note that even in a state where two errors belonging to the error category “1” are duplicated, it can be the same as a state where two errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated. .

Next, an error display area in a state where three errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 158 (2), when the gaming machine 10 generates three errors belonging to the error category “2”, for example, “shootout error”, “overflow error”, and “payout abnormality error”, An error window 8801 corresponding to “overflow error” and an error window 8802 corresponding to “payout abnormality error”
And an error window 8803 corresponding to the “shoot ball break error” in the second display area 88
Cascade display to 0.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has three errors belonging to the error category “2”,
This can be the same as when two errors belonging to the error category “2” overlap. The same applies when four or more errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated.

Note that even in a state where two errors belonging to the error category “1” are duplicated, it can be the same as a state where two errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated. .

Next, a modified example of the error display area in a state where three errors belonging to the error category “2” are generated in duplicate will be described. As shown in FIG. 158 (3), when the gaming machine 10 generates three errors belonging to the error category “2”, for example, “shoot ball break error”, “overflow error”, and “payout abnormality error”, "Shoot ball break error"
An error window 8805 corresponding to the error window 8806, an error window 8806 corresponding to the “overflow error”, and an error window 8807 corresponding to the “payout abnormality error” are displayed in cascade in the second display area 880.

At this time, the error windows 8806 and 8807 may not be able to ensure partial visibility of messages in the error window. In place of or in addition to the visibility of a message that cannot be ensured by such overlapping display of a large number of windows, error discriminability is assisted by changing the display mode of the window for each error. For example, error window 880
5 is displayed in the first background color (mono hatched hatching), the error window 8806 is displayed in the second background color (cross hatched hatching), and the error window 8807 is displayed in the third background color (dark color display). ) Is displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the number of error windows displayed in duplicate. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible to identify an error displayed in a duplicated manner by preparing a unique background color (display mode) for each error. Note that the display mode that assists in identifying errors is not limited to the background color,
It may be a pattern, shape (for example, index tag position), or the like.

In the eighth embodiment, the priority order of errors is specified in advance as shown in FIG. 147. However, as a modified example, the priority order of errors may be determined afterwards without being specified in advance. For example, the priority order may be determined according to the error generation order, or the priority order may be determined according to the recommended error release order. For example, when it is necessary to open the front frame 11 for error cancellation, a “front frame opening error” may occur as a new error during the error cancellation operation that has occurred previously. Prior to the error notification in which such a “front frame opening error” has occurred first, the workability of error cancellation may be reduced.
Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress a reduction in workability of error cancellation by determining a flexible priority.

Note that the display device 41 includes a first display area 870, a second display area 880, and a third display area 890.
However, two or more display devices include the first display area 870 and the second display area 88.
0 and the third display area 890 may be shared and included. For example, the first display device may include two of the first display region 870, the second display region 880, and the third display region 890, and the second display device may include the remainder. Further, each of the first display device, the second display device, and the third display device may include a first display area 870, a second display area 880, and a third display area 890, respectively.

Next, a modified example of error display that makes it possible to identify all errors occurring at the same time even if a plurality of errors overlap will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 1) of an error display aspect of the modification example of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 159 (1), the gaming machine 10 assigns a unique bit for each error. For example, in the gaming machine 10, in order from bit “0” to bit “15”, “RAM initialization”, “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize winning error”, “magnetic error”, “board” "Radio wave error", "Frame radio wave error", "Strong error reservation", "Front frame open error", "Game frame open error", "Starting port error", "Switch abnormal error", "Weak error reservation", "Shoot" One bit is assigned to each of “ball-out error”, “overflow error”, “payout abnormality error”, and “power failure recovery”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (1), “big prize opening illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”
, “Panel error”, “out of shot ball error”, “overflow error”, and “
When the six errors “payout abnormality error” are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 displays error windows 8721, 8722, 8723 in the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.
Error windows 8821, 8822, and 8823 are displayed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 ensures the visibility of the error window 8721 by displaying the error window 8721 in the forefront in the first display area 870, but does not secure sufficient visibility for the error windows 8722 and 8723. . In such a display state, the observer can confirm the occurrence of a “big prize winning prize error” and the presence of two errors hidden there, but when the error window overlaps, the number can be ascertained. Is not easy.

Further, the gaming machine 10 ensures the visibility of the error window 8821 by displaying the error window 8821 in the foreground in the second display area 880.
Sufficient visibility is not secured for 822 and 8823. In such a display state,
The observer can confirm the occurrence of a “shoot ball break error” and the presence of two errors hidden there, but it is not easy to grasp the number when the error windows overlap.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the bit specific to the error that is occurring to “1” and sets the bit that is specific to the error that is not occurring to “0”, and arranges the binary number “0101110000011110”.
B ”is obtained. The gaming machine 10 converts the binary number “0101110000001110B” into the hexadecimal number “580EH” and sets the error code “580E”. The gaming machine 10 displays an error code display 900 across the first display area 870 and the second display area 880.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible for the observer to grasp all the errors that are occurring. Although the gaming machine 10 assigns a unique bit for each error, the gaming machine 10 may assign a unique bit for each error in each error category. In that case, the gaming machine 10 may display an error code in each error category. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays an error code in hexadecimal notation, but is not limited to this as long as it makes it possible to grasp all the errors that have occurred, and even a character code, character code, etc. Good.

Next, when an error with the same error category and low priority as the error that has occurred first occurs later, the error that occurred later may not ensure sufficient visibility. Therefore, a modified example of error display capable of ensuring the visibility of errors that have occurred later will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 shows an example (part 2) of an error display mode of a modification of the eighth embodiment.
FIG.

First, FIG. 157 (1) shows an error display area in a state where only one error belonging to the error category “2” has occurred. The gaming machine 10 displays an error window 8831 corresponding to the “overflow error” in the second display area 880.

An error window 8831 corresponding to the “overflow error” is displayed in the second display area 880.
When a “payout abnormality error” occurs as a new error in the state displayed in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 160 (2), the error window 8 corresponding to the “payout abnormality error” is displayed on the front side of the error window 8831 corresponding to the “overflow error” regardless of the priority order.
832 is displayed.

After the game machine 10 temporarily displays the error window 8832 on the front side of the error window 8831, as shown in FIG. 160 (3), the back side of the error window 8831 corresponding to the “overflow error” according to the priority order. An error window 8832 corresponding to the “payout abnormality error” is displayed.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 changes the error occurrence status (for example, occurrence of a new error).
Can be easily known to the observer. Note that the error window that is temporarily displayed on the front side in accordance with the change in the error occurrence status may be different from the normal display mode to alert the user. For example, the error window 8832 shown in FIG. 160 (2) is larger than the normal display mode, that is, the error window 8831. Further, the error window 8832 shown in FIG. 160 (2) overlaps the display position different from the normal display position, that is, the second display area 880 while overlapping the second display area 880.

Next, another modified example of error display that makes it possible to specify all errors that are occurring simultaneously even if a plurality of errors are duplicated will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of an error display mode according to the modification example of the eighth embodiment.

First, FIG. 161 (1) shows an error display area in a state where three errors belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated. The gaming machine 10 has three errors that belong to the error category “2”, for example, “shootout error”, “overflow error”, and “
When the “abnormal payout error” occurs, an error window 8841 corresponding to the “overflow error”, an error window 8842 corresponding to the “discharge abnormal error”, and an error window 8843 corresponding to the “shootout error” are displayed in the second display area. Cascade display on 880.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a plurality of errors belonging to the error category “2”.
Even if the visibility of the error window 8841 in the forefront is sufficiently secured, the visibility of the error windows 8842 and 8843 in the back may not be secured sufficiently. In order to respond to the observer's request to confirm all errors in such a case, the gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the push button 25 and displays the error window displayed in cascade as shown in FIG.
An unfolded display or a rotation display may be performed as shown in 1 (2). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can switch between a simple error display state and a detailed error display state.

Next, a modified example of error display of error category “0” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of an error display mode according to the modification example of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 162 (1), an error display in the first display area 870 (for example, an error window 8701 corresponding to the “big prize opening illegal prize error”) or an error display in the second display area 880 (for example, “ Error window 8801 corresponding to "overflow error")
When an error window 8901 corresponding to an error belonging to the error category “0” (for example, “RAM initialization”) is displayed in the third display area 890, the error window 8901 is displayed in the first display area 870. Prior to the error display and the error display in the second display area 880, it is displayed in the foreground. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suitably notifies execution of RAM clear even when other errors are occurring. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 890.

As shown in FIG. 162 (2), it is possible to ensure the visibility of the error display in the first display area 870 and the error display in the second display area 880 even during the error display in the third display area 890. Also good. For example, when an error window 8911 corresponding to an error (for example, “RAM initialization”) belonging to the error category “0” overlaps with the error window 8701 or the error window 8801 is displayed in the third display area 890, Window 89
11 is displayed on the rearmost surface inferior to the error display in the first display area 870 and the error display in the second display area 880. However, the error window 8911 has an error window 8
An error message and a model code, which are the main parts, are exposed from the gap between the error code 701 and the error window 8801.

When the error belonging to the error category “1” and the error belonging to the error category “2” are duplicated and the error windows are displayed in cascade, the gaming machine 10
The error window 8911 may be displayed in priority to the error window 8701 or the error window 8801, and the error window 8701 or the error window 8801 may be displayed in preference to the error window 8801.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the error display in the first display area 870, the error display in the second display area 880, and the error display in the third display area 890.
At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 890.

Note that the positions of the first display area 870, the second display area 880, and the third display area 890 shown in FIGS. 162 (1) and 162 (2) are fixed, but are shown in FIG. 162 (3). The position may be changed as described above. For example, the gaming machine 10 has an error category “0”.
If an error belonging to error category “1” or an error belonging to error category “2” has occurred when an error belonging to “RAM initialization” occurs (for example, “RAM initialization”), an error belonging to error category “0” The display area is a third display area 891. The third display area 891 is arranged at a position biased to the lower left of the display area of the display device 41 and secures an empty area at the lower right of the display area of the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 arranges the error display area belonging to the error category “1” as the first display area 871 and the error display area belonging to the error category “2” as the second display area 881 in the empty area.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 may change the size in addition to the position change of the first display area 871, the second display area 881, and the third display area 891. For example, the third display area 891 is larger than the third display area 890 shown in FIGS. 162 (1) and (2). The first display area 871 and the second display area 881 are smaller than the first display area 870 and the second display area 880 shown in FIGS. 162 (1) and 162 (2).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the error window 8711 corresponding to the “big prize opening illegal prize error” in the first display area 871, and the error window 8811 corresponding to the “overflow error” in the second display area 881. And an error window 8912 corresponding to “RAM initialization” is displayed in the third display area 891.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the error display in the first display area 871, the error display in the second display area 881, and the error display in the third display area 891.
At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs an error notification sound corresponding to the error being displayed in the third display area 891.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may output an error notification sound prioritizing cancellation when a plurality of errors overlap, and display an error window of an error prioritizing cancellation by blinking, highlighting, or the like. You may make it change a mode.

Next, application of the error window cascade display to another display will be described with reference to FIG. 163 as a modification of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of the cascade display according to the modified example of the eighth embodiment.

A display screen 895 shown in FIG. 163 (1) is a normal display screen on the display device 41. For example, the display screen 895 is a display screen during symbol stop that stops and displays symbols before the start of change in the change display game. The display screen 895 includes a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 551, a hold digest display 506, and a mode display 896. 897 is displayed.

The hold display 551 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game by the number of the hold memories displayed in cascade, and can notify the expectation for the game result for each hold memory by the display mode for each hold storage displayed in cascade. For example, the hold display 551 is 3 from the top.
The display mode of the second reserved memory 551a is different from the other reserved memories, and it is notified that the degree of expectation for the game result is higher than that of the other reserved memories.

In the mode display 896, 897, the mode display 896 positioned on the front side in the cascade display reports the current game mode, and the mode display 897 positioned on the back side reports the game mode in which the next transition is made. The game mode here may be a mode on production (for example, production modes A, B, etc.), or a gaming state (for example, low probability state, high probability state, general power support state, etc.). Also good.

A display screen 898 shown in FIG. 163 (2) is a display screen at the time of hitting (big hit) in the display device 41, and includes a round display 899 in the display content. The round display 899 can clearly indicate the current number of rounds by displaying the frontmost window (for example, 5R) among the cascade-displayed windows for each round. The round display 899 can clearly indicate the number of remaining rounds by the number of windows for each round displayed in cascade. For example, display screen 898 clearly indicates that the current round is 5R and there are 3R remaining, ie, 8R. Moreover, the round display 899 can guide the value of a round by changing the display mode of the window for each round displayed in cascade. For example, in the round display 899, the display mode of the hatched window 899a is different from the display mode of the other windows, the window 899a (that is, 7R) is a 10-count winning opening, and the other windows are 1 count. You can show that the prize opening is open.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eighth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (for example, the display device 41) and a control unit (for example, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300). The controller detects that the detected error is the first
The second category (for example, the first display area 870) of the display device is displayed when it belongs to the category (for example, the error category “1”), and the detected error is different from the first category (for example, the first category). For example, when it is displayed in the second display area (for example, the second display area 880) of the display device when belonging to the error category “2”), two or more errors are displayed in the first display area or the second display area. Two or more errors are displayed in a cascade display arranged in a predetermined order (see FIGS. 155 to 158).

(2) The first category of (1) is an error related to fraud detection (for example, “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”, "Frame error" and "Strong error reservation"), and the second category is
Errors that are not related to fraud detection (for example, “front frame opening error”, “game frame opening error”,
“Starting port error”, “Switch abnormality error”, “Weak error reservation”, “Shoot ball break error”, “Overflow error”, and “Payout abnormality error”) belong to these categories (see FIG. 147).

(3) The first category of (1) is a category to which an error having a higher priority than a predetermined threshold (for example, priority “2” to “7”) belongs, and the second category is a predetermined category This is a category to which errors (for example, priority orders “8” to “15”) having a priority order lower than the threshold value belong (see FIG. 147).

(4) The first category of (1) is an error accompanying output of external information (for example, “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize winning error”, “magnetic error”, “board radio wave error”, “Frame signal error”, “Strong error reservation”, “Front frame release error”, and “Game frame release error”)
The second category is an error that does not involve external information output (for example, “starting port error”, “switch abnormal error”, “weak error reservation”, “shoot ball break error”, “overflow error”) , And “dispensing abnormality error”) (see FIG. 148).

(5) The first category of (1) is an error associated with sound output (for example, “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize error”, “magnetic error”, “board radio wave error”, “ Frame radio wave error ”,“ strong error reservation ”,“ front frame open error ”, and“ game frame open error ”) belong to the category, and the second category is an error not accompanied by sound output (for example,“ starting port ” "Error", "Switch abnormal error", "Weak error reservation", "Shoot ball break error", "Overflow error", and "Discharge abnormal error") (see FIG. 149)
reference).

(6) The first category of (1) is an error requesting the administrator to deal with (for example, “big prize winning illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize winning error”, “magnetic error”, “panel radio wave error”) , "
`` Frame radio wave error '', `` Strong error reservation '', `` Front frame release error '', `` Game frame release error '', `` Start-up error '', `` Switch error error '', `` Weak error reservation '', `` Shoot ball break error ''
, And “payout abnormality error”), and the second category is a category to which an error (for example, “overflow error”) that requires the player to deal with belongs (see FIG. 150).

(7) The first category of (1) includes errors detected by the main control device (for example, the game control device 100) (for example, “big prize opening illegal prize error”, “general power illegal prize winning error”, “magnetic” "Error", "panel radio wave error", "frame radio wave error", "strong error reservation", "front frame open error", "game frame open error", "start-up port error", "switch abnormal error", "weak error" “Reservation”, “Shoot ball break error”, “Overflow error”, and “Payout abnormality error”) belong to the category, and the second category is produced based on the command of the slave control device (for example, the game control device 100) The category to which the errors (for example, “connector disconnection 1”, “connector disconnection 2”, “operation abnormality 1”, and “operation abnormality 2”) detected by the production control apparatus 300 that controls the apparatus belong. That (see Fig. 151).

(8) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a sound output device (for example, speakers 19a and 19b). When the error in the first category and the error in the second category overlap, the control unit
Either one of the error notification sounds is output (see FIG. 152).

(9) The control unit of (8) differs in the sound output mode of the error notification sound depending on whether the error of the first category and the error of the second category overlap or not (see FIG. 153).
(10) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a plurality of sound output devices (for example, speakers 19a and 19).
b). The control unit outputs error notification sounds from different sound output devices for the first category error and the second category error (see FIG. 154).

(11) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (for example, the display device 41), a sound output device (for example, speakers 19a and 19b), and a control unit (for example, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300). Including. When the detected error belongs to the first category (for example, the error category “1”), the control unit controls the first display area (for example, the first display area 87) of the display device.
0) and the detected error is a second category (e.g., different from the first category)
When the error belongs to the error category “2”), the error is displayed in the second display area (for example, the second display area 880) of the display device, and the error in the first category and the error in the second category overlap. Either one of the error notification sounds is output from the sound output device (see FIG. 152).

The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing contents can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. As a computer-readable recording medium, a magnetic storage device,
There are optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -RO
M / RW (ReWritable). For magneto-optical recording media, MO (Magneto-Optical disk)
Etc.

When distributing the program, for example, the DVD or C on which the program is recorded
A portable recording medium such as a D-ROM is sold. It is also possible to store the program in a storage device of a server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via a network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. In addition, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program.

In addition, at least a part of the processing functions described above is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims,
It is intended that all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the terms of the claims are included.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 41 Display apparatus 100 Game control apparatus 300 Effect control apparatus

Claims (1)

A sound output device;
One of the cases where the error of the first category in which the detected error belongs to the first category and the error of the second category in which the detected error belongs to the second category different from the first category are overlapped A control unit for outputting a notification sound of the error from the sound output device;
Including gaming machines.

Images